Siemens Lad

Preface, Contents Part 1: Working with the Ladder Editor Part 2: Language Description
SIMATIC
Appendix
Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 Programming

Manual
Glossary, Index
C79000-G7076-C504-02
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATICR and SINECR are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Copyright E Siemens AG 1996 All rights reserved
Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG Automation Group Industrial Automation Systems Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nrnberg
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
E Siemens AG 1996 Technical data subject to change. C79000-G7076-C504
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
ii
Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000 G7076 C504 02
Preface
Purpose
This manual is your guide to creating user programs in the Ladder Logic (LAD) programming language. The manual explains the basic procedures for creating programs. The online help contains more detailed information about operating procedures. This manual also includes a reference section that describes the syntax and functions of the language elements of Ladder Diagram.
Audience
The manual is intended for S7 programmers, operators, and maintenance/service personnel. A working knowledge of automation procedures is essential.
Scope of the Manual
This manual is valid for release 3.0 of the STEP 7 programming software package.
Compliance with Standards
LAD corresponds to the Ladder Logic language defined in the International Electrotechnical Commissions standard IEC 1131-3. For further details, refer to the table of standards in the STEP 7 file NORM_TBL.WRI.
Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02
iii
Preface
Overview of the STEP 7 Documentation
There is a wide range of both general and task-oriented user documentation available to support you when configuring and programming an S7 programmable controller. The following descriptions and the figure below will help you to find the user documentation you require.
This symbol indicates the order in which you should read the manuals, especially as a first-time user of S7. Symbol Meaning This documentation introduces the methodology. This is a reference manual on a specific topic. The documentation is supported by online help.
Primer
S7-300 Programmable Controller Quick Start Manuals on S7-300/S7-400 Hardware
/30/
Manual
Progr. Manual
System Software for S7-300/S7-400 Program Design
/234/
Online Help User Manual Standard Software for S7 Converting S5 Programs
Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7
User Manual
/231/
/230/
STL
LAD
FBD
SCL
/232/
/233/
/236/
/250/
Reference Manual System Software for S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions
GRAPH for S7
HiGraph
CFCs for S7
/235/
/251/
/252/
/254/
Language Packages
/xxx/: Number in the list of references
iv
Preface
Table 1-1
Summary of the Documentation Title Subject The primer provides you with a very simple introduction to the methods of configuring and programming an S7-300/400. It is particularly suitable for first-time users of an S7 programmable logic controller. The S7-300/400 Program Design programming manual provides you with the basic information you require about the structure of the operating system and a user program for an S7 CPU. First-time users of an S7-300/400 should use this manual to get a basic overview of programming methods on which to base the design of a user program. The S7 CPUs have system functions and organization blocks integrated in the operating system that can be used when programming. The manual provides you with an overview of the system functions, organization blocks and loadable standard functions available with an S7 programmable controller and contains detailed interface descriptions explaining how to use the functions and blocks in your user program. The STEP 7 User Manual explains the basic use and functions of the STEP 7 automation software. Whether you are a first-time user of STEP 7 or an experienced STEP 5 user, the manual will provide you with an overview of the procedures for configuring, programming and getting started with an S7-300/400 programmable controller. When working with the software, you can call up the online help which supports you with information about specific details of the program. You require the Converting S5 Programs User Manual if you want to convert existing S5 programs and to run them on S7 CPUs. The manual explains how to use the converter. The online help system provides more detailed information about using the specific converter functions. The online help system also includes an interface description of the available converted S7 functions. The manuals for the language packages STL, LAD, FBD, and SCL contain both instructions for the user and a description of the language. To program an S7-300/400, you only require one of the languages, but you can, if required, mix the languages within a project. When using one of the languages for the first time, it is advisable to familiarize yourself with the methods of creating a program as explained in the manual. When working with the software, you can use the online help system which provides you with detailed information about using the editors and compilers.
S7-300 Programmable Controller Quick Start, Primer S7-300/400 Program Design Programming Manual S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual
STEP 7 User Manual
Converting S5 Programs User Manual
STL, LAD, FBD, SCL1 Manuals
GRAPH1 , HiGraph1, CFC1 Manuals
The GRAPH, HiGraph, and CFC languages provide you with optional methods for implementing sequential control systems, status control systems, or graphical interconnection of blocks. The manuals contain both the user instructions and the description of the language. When using one of these languages for the first time, it is advisable to familiarize yourself with the methods of creating a program based on the S7-300 and S7-400 Program Design manual. When working with the software, you can also use the online help system (with the exception of HiGraph) that provides you with detailed information about using the editors and compilers.
Optional package for system software for S7-300/S7-400
Preface
How to Use This Manual
To use the LAD effectively, you should already be familiar with the theory behind S7 programs. This is explained in the Programming Manual /234/. The language packages also use the standard software for S7, so you you should also be familiar with the standard software as described in the User Manual /231/. The manual is divided into the following parts:
S Part 1 introduces you to the use of the Editor. S Part 2 explains all LAD operations and is intendede for reference
purposes.
S The glossary includes definitions of the basic terms. S The index helps you find the relevant page on a subject of your choice.
Conventions References to other manuals and documentation are indicated by numbers in slashes /.../. These numbers refer to the titles of manuals listed in Appendix KEIN MERKER.
Additional Assistance
If you have any questions regarding the software described in this manual and cannot find an answer here or in the online help, please contact the Siemens representative in your area. You will find a list of addresses in the Appendix of /70/ or /100/, or in catalogs, and in Compuserve (go autforum). You can also contact our Hotline under the following phone or fax number: Tel. (+49) (911) 895-7000 (Fax 7001) If you have any questions or comments on this manual, please fill out the remarks form at the end of the manual and return it to the address shown on the form. We would be grateful if you could also take the time to answer the questions giving your personal opinion of the manual. Siemens also offers a number of training courses to introduce you to the SIMATIC S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in Nuremberg, Germany for details: D-90327 Nuremberg, Tel. (+49) (911) 895-3154.
Notes on Using the Manual
The users guide sections in this manual do not describe procedures in step-by-step detail, but simply outline basic procedures. You will find more detailed information on the individual dialogs in the software and how to use them in the online help.
vi
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part 1: Working with the Ladder Editor 1 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 Structure of User Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating User Programs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules to Observe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2-1 2-2 2-4 2-7 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-6 3-8 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-13 3-15 3-18 3-21 3-23 3-24 3-26 3-28 iii
Creating Logic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 Creating Logic Blocks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logic Blocks in the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Variable Declaration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Variable Declaration Tables Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Declaring Multiple Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning System Attributes for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Code Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editable Parts of the Code Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Guidelines for Entering Ladder Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Ladder Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parallel Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Addresses and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbolic Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing in the Overwrite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Titles and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Contents
Creating Data Blocks and User-Defined Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Creating Data Blocks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Declaration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Actual Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating User-Defined Data Types (UDTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 4-2 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-8 5-1 5-2 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8
Editing the Block Properties and Testing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 Editing the Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing your Ladder Program - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Program Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Trigger Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing a Test Environment and Starting/Stopping the Program Status
Part 2: Language Description 6 Configuration and Elements of Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 7 Elements and Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boolean Logic and Truth Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Significance of the CPU Registers in Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-2 6-6 6-12 7-1 7-2 7-4 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-15
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normally Open Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normally Closed Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Midline Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invert Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save RLO to BR Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Counter Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up Counter Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Counter Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Timer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Pulse Timer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
Contents
8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 8.19 8.20 8.21 8.22 8.23 9
On-Delay Timer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Delay Timer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive RLO Edge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative RLO Edge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address Positive Edge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address Negative Edge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Reset Flipflop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Set Flipflop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-16 8-17 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 9-1 9-2 9-4 9-5 9-7 9-9 9-11 9-13 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-5 10-7 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9
Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 Location of a Timer in Memory and Components of a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Right Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse S5 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Pulse S5 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Delay S5 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Delay S5 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Location of a Counter in Memory and Components of a Counter . . . . . . . Up-Down Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Integer Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 Add Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtract Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtract Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Fraction Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Evaluating the Bits of the Status Word After Integer Math Instructions . . . 11-11
ix
Contents
12
Floating-Point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtract Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaluating the Bits of the Status Word After Floating-Point Instructions . . Establishing the Absolute Value of a Floating-Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing the Square and/or the Square Root of a Floating-Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9
Establishing the Natural Logarithm of a Floating-Point Number . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Establishing the Exponential Value of a Floating-Point Number . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Establishing the Trigonometrical Functions of Angles as Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-5 14-1 14-2 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-7 14-8 14-9
13
Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 13.2 13.3 Compare Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Move and Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11 14.12 14.13 14.14 14.15 14.16 Assign a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCD to Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integer to BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integer to Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCD to Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Integer to BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Integer to Floating-Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ones Complement Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Ones Complement Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Twos Complement Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Twos Complement Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Negate Floating-Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Round to Double Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Truncate Double Integer Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Contents
15
Word Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAnd Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAnd Double Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WOr Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WOr Double Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WXOr Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WXOr Double Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 15-7 15-8 16-1 16-2
16
Shift and Rotate Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 16.2 Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotate Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 17-1 17-2 18-1 18-2 18-3 18-4 18-5 18-6 19-1 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-6 19-7 19-9 20-1 20-2 20-4 20-7 20-8 20-9
17
Data Block Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Open Data Block: DB or DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
Jump Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump in the Block If RLO = 1 (Unconditional Jump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump in the Block If RLO = 1 (Conditional Jump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump in the Block If RLO = 0 (Jump-If-Not) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Status Bit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Bit BR Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Result Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Bits Unordered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Bit Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Bit Overflow Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Program Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 Calling FCs/SFCs from Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling FBs, FCs, SFBs, SFCs, and Multiple Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Control Relay Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Control Relay Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Control Relay On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
xi
Contents
Appendix A Alphabetical Listing of Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 B Listing with International Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing with International Names and SIMATIC Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing with SIMATIC Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing with SIMATIC Names and International Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing with International Short Names and SIMATIC Short Names . . . . . A-1 A-2 A-5 A-9 A-12 A-16 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-7 B-11 B-13 B-14 C-1 C-2 D-1
Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bit Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counter and Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integer Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Word Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 Number Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary-1 Index-1
xii
Part 1: Working with the Ladder Editor
Product Overview Introduction Creating Logic Blocks Creating Data Blocks and User Data Types Editing the Block Properties and Testing the Program
1 2 3 4 5
1-2
Product Overview
What is LAD?
LAD stands for Ladder Logic. LAD is a graphic programming language. The syntax of the instructions is similar to a circuit diagram. With Ladder Logic, you can follow the signal flow between power rails via inputs, outputs, and instructions.
The Programming Language Ladder Logic
The programming language Ladder Logic has all the necessary elements for creating a complete user program. It contains the complete range of basic instructions and a wide range of addresses are available. Functions and function blocks allow you to structure your LAD program clearly.
The Programming Package
The LAD Programming Package is an integral part of the STEP 7 Standard Software. This means that following the installation of your STEP 7 software, all the editor functions, compiler functions, and test/debug functions for LAD are available to you. Using LAD, you can create your own user program with the Incremental Editor. The input of the local block data structure is made easier with the help of table editors. There are three programming languages in the standard software, STL, FBD, and LAD. You can switch from one language to the other almost without restriction and choose the most suitable language for the particular block you are programming. If you write programs in LAD or FBD, you can always switch over to the STL representation. If you convert LAD programs into FBD programs and vice versa, program elements that cannot be represented in the destination language are displayed in STL.
1-1
1-2
Introduction
2
This chapter is a brief description of the structure of a user program consisting of blocks. The LAD Editor runs on the platform of the SIMATIC Manager which underlies all STEP 7 applications. This chapter explains how to change from the SIMATIC Manager to the LAD Editor and how the created blocks fit into the project structure.
In This Chapter
Chapter Overview
2.1 2.2 2.3
Section
Description Structure of User Programs Creating User Programs - Overview Rules to Observe
Page 2-2 2-4 2-7
2-1
Introduction
2.1
Structure of User Programs
Logic Blocks and Data Blocks
A user program consists of logic blocks and data blocks. Logic blocks are blocks with a code section such as organization blocks, function blocks, or functions.
Organization Blocks
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system and the user program. Different organization blocks have different functions. To create the LAD user program for your S7 CPU, you select the organization blocks necessary for your specific automation task. For the most basic task you will require the following:
S Startup (OB100, OB101) S Scan cycle (OB1) S Error handling (OB80 to OB87, OB121, OB122), if you do not want your
CPU to switch to STOP when an error occurs. There are also organization blocks available to handle interrupts in the CPU or other interrupts from the process. For detailed information about the functions of each organization block and the startup information provided by the CPU operating system, refer to the Reference Manual /235/.
Functions/ Function Blocks
You can program every organization block as a structured program by creating functions (FCs) and function blocks (FBs) and calling them in the code section. When the blocks are called, you supply the data required for the declared parameters.
S A function block (FB) is a logic block with memory. This memory

takes the form of instance data blocks assigned to the FB. The instance DBs store all the actual parameters and static data relating to the function block.
S A function (FC) is a logic block without memory, in other words

without associated instance DBs. After an FC has been processed, the output parameters contain the calculated function values. Once the function has been called, the user decides how the actual parameters are used and stored.
Data
The operating system makes the following data available:
S Peripheral I/Os S Process image input/output S Bit memory S Timers S Counters
2-2
Introduction
You can also define your own data:
S You can define shared data in data blocks. This data is accessible to the
entire user program.
S You can define static variables. These are only valid in the function block
within which they are defined. Every time an FB is called, an instance data block is specified which includes all parameters and the static data. In the case of multiple instances, the instance and static data are incorporated in the instance data block.
S You can define temporary data when you create logic blocks. This data
only requires stack memory during the actual processing of the block.
Data Blocks
Data blocks store the data of the user program. There are two types of data blocks: shared data blocks and instance data blocks.
S Shared DBs can be accessed by all the blocks in the program. S Instance data blocks are assigned to a function block and contain not only
the data of the function block but also the data of any defined multiple instances. For this reason, you should only access an instance data block in connection with its own specific function block.
Additional Information
The Programming Manual /234/ contains an introduction to programming methods.
2-3
Introduction
2.2
Creating User Programs Overview
User Program
A user program that runs on an S7 CPU is essentially made up of blocks. It also contains information such as data about the system configuration and about system networking. Depending on your application, the user program will include the following elements:
S Organization blocks (OBs) S Function blocks (FBs) S Functions (FCs) S Data blocks (DBs)
To simplify your work, you can create your own user-defined data types (UDTs), which can be used either as data types in their own right or as a template for creating data blocks. Some of the frequently used blocks such as the system function blocks (SFBs) and the system functions (SFCs) are integrated on the CPU. Other blocks (for example blocks for IEC functions or closed-loop controller blocks) are available as separate packages. You do not need to program these blocks but simply load them into your user program. Note You can check which SFBs and SFCs are integrated on your CPU online by clicking PLC " Module Information... in the menu bar.
LAD Incremental Editor
The STEP 7 standard software includes an editor for programming blocks. The editor can be set to the LAD programming language to allow you to program logic blocks (OBs, FBs, FCs). The LAD Editor works incrementally, which means that the syntax of each entry you make is checked. Syntax errors are reported and illegal arrangements of LAD elements or addresses are rejected immediately.
Starting from the SIMATIC Manager
The LAD Editor is started from the SIMATIC Manager. You must first create a project containing an S7 program in the SIMATIC Manager before you can call the editor. The program you create can be either dependent or independent of the hardware. You either add the S7 program directly into the project or edit the S7 program assigned to the programmable module. The program itself can contain the user program (blocks), source files, or charts. With the LAD Editor, you can only edit blocks stored in the folder of the user program.
2-4
Introduction
SIMATIC Manager TRAFFIC File Edit Insert PLC View

ON OFF
Options Window
Help
TRAFFIC - <Offline> (Project) TRAFFIC S7 Program (1) Source Files Blocks SIMATIC 300 Station1 DB5 DB6 OB1 FB6
Press F1 for help
NUM
Figure 2-1 Starting the LAD Editor from the SIMATIC Manager
Creating a Block
To create a block for the first time, you first create an empty block in the SIMATIC Manager with which you can then open the Editor. Once you have opened the LAD Editor you can then create further blocks.
S In the SIMATIC Manager you can select the Blocks folder and insert
the block type you want by selecting Insert " S7 Block " .... The new block appears on the right hand side of the project window.
S Once you are in the editor, you can create a block by selecting File "
New. In the dialog box that follows you are prompted to specify the block type and number you require.
Choosing a Programming Language
When you create a block, you also select the programming language you want to use. The corresponding editor is then activated based on this selection. To program in LAD, select LAD as the working language.
Opening a Block
You can open a block in the SIMATIC Manager by double-clicking the block. Alternatively, you can open it by either selecting the menu command Edit " Open Object or by clicking the corresponding button in the toolbar.
2-5
Introduction
Saving and Downloading Blocks
When you save a block in the Editor, remember the following points:
S File " Save always saves the block in the Blocks folder on the hard disk
of your programming device/PC.
S PLC " Download downloads the opened block to the CPU.

After creating the blocks for your user program, download them to the S7 CPU in your SIMATIC Manager. For further information about downloading user programs, refer to the User Manual /231/. Note It is not always sufficient to download the created blocks individually to the CPU because data from the system configuration may sometimes be required. You should therefore download the complete program in the SIMATIC Manager.
Calling Supporting Functions
The LAD Editor has the following functions which you will find useful when creating programs and starting up.
Table 2-1 Supporting Functions in the LAD Editor
Function Call reference data of the active user programs Edit the symbol table / individual symbols Monitor / modify variables Display / modify operating mode or memory reset on the CPU Display the status of the selected module Set the time and date on the CPU
Menu Command Options " Reference Data Options " Symbol Table / Options " Edit Symbols PLC " Monitor/Modify Variables PLC " Operating Mode or PLC " Clear/Reset PLC " Module Information PLC " Set Time and Date
These functions are described in detail in the User Manual /231/.
2-6
Introduction
2.3
Rules to Observe
Order of Creating Blocks
The order in which you create logic blocks and data blocks in a user program is important. As a rule: if blocks are called within other blocks, the called blocks must already exist before you program their calls. Entering a non-existent block as a Ladder element (box) is not possible. If you program a call for a non-existent block using CALL, an error is reported when you save the program because the called block cannot be found.
Editing during Program Execution
With STEP 7 you can edit a user program stored on the CPU online while the CPU is in the RUN mode. Warning If you make online modifications to a program while it is running, this can lead to malfunctions and unforeseen reactions in your plant or process that could cause injury to persons or damage to equipment. If the CPU is switched online and is in the RUN mode, modifying the user program stored on the CPU can cause situations in which machines and devices are suddenly turned on or off, potentially causing injury to persons or damage to equipment. Always plan the sequence of events in your process in accordance with the pertinent safety regulations. Never attempt to make online modifications to a program while it is running without having first considered the consequences and taking appropriate action to prevent accidents.
Note For information about working online and offline, refer to the User Manual /231/.
2-7
Introduction
2-8
Creating Logic Blocks
3
Description Page 3-2 3-3 3-6 3-8 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-15 3-18 3-21 3-23 3-24 3-26 3-28
In This Chapter
A user program cannot exist without logic blocks. In many situations, you can use the blocks integrated on the CPU or the available standard function blocks. You will, however, always have to create a number of logic blocks yourself. This chapter describes how to create blocks using the LAD Editor.
Section 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14
Chapter Overview
Creating Logic Blocks Overview Logic Blocks in the Editor Structure of the Variable Declaration Table Editing Variable Declaration Tables Overview Declaring Multiple Instances Assigning System Attributes for Parameters Editing the Code Section Overview Basic Guidelines for Entering Ladder Logic Instructions Entering Ladder Elements Creating Parallel Branches Editing Addresses and Parameters Symbolic Addressing Editing in Overwrite Mode Entering Titles and Comments
3-1
3.1
Creating Logic Blocks Overview
Logic Blocks
Logic blocks (OBs, FBs, FCs) are made up of a variable declaration section and a code section. They also have certain properties. When programming, you must edit the following three sections:
S Variable declaration table: In the variable declaration table, you declare

the parameters, the system attributes for parameters, and the local variables of your block.
S Code section: In the code section, you program the block code that is to
be executed by the programmable controller. This consists of one or more networks with Ladder elements.
S Block properties: The block properties include additional information,

such as a time stamp and a path name, which is entered by the system itself. In addition to these items you can enter further details about the name, family, release and author and can assign system attributes for blocks (see Chapter 5).
Editing a Logic Block
The order in which you edit the three sections is irrelevant and you can, of course, make corrections and additions. When you refer to symbols from the symbol table, you should make sure that they are complete and, when necessary, add any missing information.
Create a logic block (FB, FC or OB) in the SIMATIC Manager. LAD Editor Make the settings for the editor
Edit the variable declaration table for the block
Edit the code section
Enter the block properties
Save the block
Figure 3-1
Procedure for Creating Logic Blocks in LAD
3-2
3.2
Logic Blocks in the Editor
Overview
Before you start programming in the LAD Editor, you should familiarize yourself with the various ways in which you can customize the editor to suit your preferences and method of working.
Settings in the Editor
With the menu command Options " Customize, you can open a tabbed page dialog box. In the Editor tabbed page, you can make the following basic settings for block programming:
S Font (type style, size) used in text and tables S The programming language of your choice (FBD, LAD, or STL). A new
block will be opened in FBD, LAD, or STL depending on the programming language you select. Bearing in mind certain restrictions, you can switch to one of the other languages later on and still view the block.
S Display of symbols and comment in the new block (on or off)

The settings for language, comment and symbols can be altered at any time during editing by using the commands in the View ... menu.
Settings for LAD
In the LAD/FBD tabbed page, which you also display with Options " Customize, you can make the following basic settings:
S Ladder Layout: determines the display size of your networks. The

selected size decides how many LAD elements you can position next to each other in one network. This setting also has effects when printing out the block.
S Width of Address Field: determines the width of text fields for addresses.
If the width is exceeded, a line break is made. A large address field is more practical for symbolic addressing, a small field is sufficient for absolute addressing.
S Line/Color for: the selected element, contact, status fulfilled, status not
fulfilled
3-3
Main Window of the LAD Editor
When you open a logic block, a window appears displaying the following:
S The variable declaration table of the block in the upper part S The code section in the lower part, in which you edit the actual block
code
FB6-<Offline>-LAD/STL/FBD: Programming S7 Blocks

File Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
FB6-<Offline>
Address Decl. Symbol 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 in in in in in dur_g_p del_r_p starter t_dur_y_car t_dur_g_ped Data Type Initial Value S5TIME S5TIME BOOL TIMER TIMER S5T#0MS S5T#0MS FALSE Comment
Network 1 : Red for road traffic #starter #condition Network 2 : Green for road traffic #condition #g car #t_next_red_car #t_dur_r_car #condition
Network 3 : Start permanent amber for cars #condition #g car SE S5T#3S
Figure 3-2
Variable Declaration Table and Code Section in LAD
The block properties are edited in their own dialog (see Chapter 5). The editor allows you enables you to open and work on several blocks simultaneously. Relationship between the Variable Declaration and Code Section The variable declaration table and the code section are closely linked as the names from the variable declaration table are used in the code section. This means that changes in the variable declaration table also affect the code section and therefore the entire block.
3-4
Table 3-1
Relationship between Variable Declaration and Code Section Reaction in the Code Section If invalid code exists, previously undeclared variable becomes valid Symbol is immediately shown everywhere with new name Code is not changed If invalid code exists, it becomes valid If invalid code exists, it becomes valid and if valid code exists, it becomes invalid Valid code becomes invalid None None None None
Action in the Variable Declaration New correct entry Correct name change without type change Correct name is changed to an invalid name Invalid name is changed to a correct name
Type change
Symbol deleted that is being used in the code Comment change Incorrect entry of a new variable Deleting an unused variable Initial value change
3-5
3.3
Structure of the Variable Declaration Table
Overview
In the variable declaration table, you set the local variables including the formal parameters of the block and the system attributes for parameters. This has (among other things) the following effects:
S As a result of the declaration, memory is reserved in the local data stack

or instance data block.
S By setting the input, output, and in/out parameters you also define the
interface for calling a block in the program.
S Declaring variables in a function block provides the data structure for any
instance data block that you associate with the function block.
S By setting system attributes, you assign special properties to parameters

for message and connection configuration, operator interface functions and process control configuration.
Structure of the Variable Declaration Table
After opening a new logic block, a default variable declaration table is displayed on the screen. This lists all the permitted declaration types for the specific block (in, out, in_out, stat, temp) in the appropriate order. When creating a new OB, a standard variable declaration is displayed in which you can change the values. The variable declaration table contains entries for the address, declaration, symbolic name, data type, initial value, and comment for the variables. Each table row represents a variable declaration. Variables of the data type array or structure require more than one row.
TRAFFIC\...\FB40 - <Offline>
Address 0.0 0.1 2.0 2.1 4.0 6.0 Decl. in in out out in_out in_out Symbol ein start Motor Message in_outp1 in_outp2 Data Type BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT INT Initial Value Comment FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 0 0 Light on Switch Motor Motor
Figure 3-3 Example of a Variable Declaration Table
3-6
Meaning of the Columns

Table 3-2 Column Address
The columns in the variable declaration table are interpreted as follows:
Columns of the Variable Declaration Table Meaning Address in format BYTE.BIT Remarks In the case of data types which require more than one byte, the address indicates this with a jump to the next byte address. Key: * : Size of an array element in bytes + : Initial address, ref. to the structure start = : Total memory requirement of a structure Editing System entry: the address is assigned and displayed by the system after you have finished entering your declaration. Default settings according to block type
Decl.
Declaration type Purpose of the variables
The following are possible depending on block type: Input parameters in Output parameters out In/out parameters in_out Static variables stat Temporary variables temp
Symbol Data Type
Symbolic name of variables Data type of the variable (BOOL, INT, WORD, ARRAY etc.) Initial value, when the software should not assume a default value
The name must begin with a letter. Reserved Mandatory keywords are not permitted. Basic data types can be selected in the menu Mandatory with the right mouse button. Must be compatible with the data type. Unless a specific actual value has been selected, the initial value is used as the actual value of the variable when editing a DB for the first time. Optional
Initial Value
Comment
Comment on documentation
Optional
Meaning of the Golf Flag
If you have assigned system attributes to a variable, a symbol resembling a golf flag appears in the Symbol column (see Figure 3-3). Double-click the flag to open the System Attributes dialog box.
Altering the Column Width
You can vary the width of the columns. Position the mouse pointer between two columns and holding the left mouse button pressed move the mouse horizontally. As an alternative, you can alter the width of the column using the menu command View " Column Width... having previously selected the table. This allows you to minimize the optional comment and initial value columns and focus solely on the remaining columns.
3-7
3.4
Editing Variable Declaration Tables Overview
Procedure
After you have entered the required declaration type of a new declaration, enter the name of the variables, the data type, the initial value (optional) and the comment (optional). You can move the cursor to the next field with the TAB key. At the end of a row an address will be assigned to the variable automatically. After each table field has been edited, its syntax is checked and any errors are displayed in red. At this point, you can continue editing the table and postpone the correction of errors to a later stage.
Editing Functions
All the usual functions in the Edit menu are available to you when editing a table. Using the context-sensitive right mouse button makes editing easier. The menu displayed with the right mouse button also helps you to enter the data type. The Data Type menu includes all elementary data types. You can select single rows by clicking the write-protected address cell. You can also select several rows of the same declaration type by holding down the SHIFT key. The selected rows appear on a black background.
Changing the Declaration Type
The Decl. column is read-only. The declaration type is determined by the position of the declaration within the table. This ensures that variables can only be entered in the correct order of their declaration types. If you want to change the declaration type of a declaration, cut the declaration first and then paste it under the new declaration type.
Entering Structures
If you want to enter a structure as a variable, enter the name in the Symbol column and the keyword STRUCT in the data type column. Press either the TAB or the RETURN key to insert an empty row plus a final row (END_STRUCT) for the structure. In the empty row, enter the elements of the structure by entering its name, data type and its initial value (optional). You can create more rows and insert further elements using either the menu commands or by pressing RETURN. If you want to select a structure, click the address or declaration cell of the first or last row of the structure (containing the keyword STRUCT or END_STRUCT). You can select individual declarations within a structure by clicking the address cell in the relevant row. If you want to enter a structure within another structure, the hierarchy is indicated by the indented variable names.
3-8
Entering Arrays
To enter an array as a data type, enter the name in the Symbol column and the keyword ARRAY in the cell for the data type together with the array size, for example array [1..20, 3..24] for a two-dimensional array. Press the TAB key (if necessary, more than once) to insert a row in which you can enter the data type of the array. If you want to select an array, click the address cell in the relevant row. Initial values for each array element can be entered singly or with a repetition factor (see Figure 3-4):
S Individual entry: You assign each element its own initial value. The
values are separated by commas.
S Repetition factor: The same initial value can be assigned to several

elements. The value itself is shown in parentheses and is preceded by the repetition factor which defines the number of elements.
Example
Figure 3-4 shows an example of a variable declaration table:
Address 0.0 +0.0 +2.0 +4.0 =6.0 6.0 *2.0 Decl. Symbol in in in in in in in structur1 var1 var2 var3 array1 Data Type STRUCT BOOL INT WORD END_STRUCT ARRAY[1..20,1..40] BOOL FALSE 0 W#16#0 Initial Value Comment
TRUE
Figure 3-4
Structures and Arrays in a Variable Declaration Table
Note If you make changes to the variable declaration of blocks whose calls you have already programmed, time stamp conflicts may occur. You should therefore first program all blocks to be called, and then program the blocks that call them. In the case of function blocks, instance DBs should also be re-created. When making changes to a UDT which was entered as a data type in a variable declaration, check the variable declaration of the block and then save it again.
3-9
3.5
Declaring Multiple Instances
Multiple Instances
A multiple instance results from declaring a static variable of the same data type as a function block (FB). In the code section, the instance is called as a Ladder element. For more detailed information about multiple instances, refer to the Programming Manual /234/. Part 2 of this manual explains the syntax for calling a multiple instance.
Rules
Keep to the following rules when declaring multiple instances:
S Declaring multiple instances is only possible in function blocks S Function blocks within which a multiple instance has been declared must
also have an associated instance DB.
S A multiple instance can only be declared as a static variable (declaration

type stat).
Inputting Multiple Instances
To declare a multiple instance, you enter the variable name in the Symbol column after the declaration type stat. Under data type, you enter the function block. This can be done either by entering the absolute name of the FB or a symbolic name. You can also add an optional comment.
TRAFFIC\...\FB60-<Offline>
Address 0.0 2.0 4.0 Decl. in out in_out stat 0.0 temp Symbol varin varout Data TypeInitial Value Comment BYTE BYTE B#16#0 B#16#0 B#16#0 local instance
varinout BYTE locinst tempo FB6 REAL
Figure 3-5
Declaration of Multiple Instances (Example)
3-10
3.6
Assigning System Attributes for Parameters
System Attributes
You can assign system attributes to blocks and parameters. These influence the message and connection configuration, operator interface functions, and process control configuration. You can assign system attributes for parameters in the variable declaration table.
Entering System Attributes for Parameters
To enter system attributes for parameters, select the name of the parameter in the variable declaration table and select Edit " Object Properties in the menu bar to display the Properties dialog. Select the System Attributes tabbed page and enter the required attribute and its value. Table 3-3 shows which system attributes you can enter in the variable declaration table.
Table 3-3 Attribute S7_server
System Attributes for Parameters Value When to Assign the Attribute Permitted Declaration type IN
connection, alarm_archiv When the parameter is relevant to connection or message configuration. This parameter contains the connection or message number. alarm, alarm_8, alarm_8p, alarm_s, notify, ar_send When the parameter will define the message block type in a message block (only possible when the S7_server attribute is set to alarm_archiv).
S7_a_type
IN, only with blocks of the type FB and SFB IN
S7_co
pbkl, pbk, ptpl, obkl, fdl, When the parameter will specify the connection iso, pbks, obkv type in the connection configuration (only possible when the S7_server attribute is set to connection). true, false When the parameter will be modified or monitored from an operator panel. When the parameter is assigned a shortcut to evaluate analog values. When the parameter is assigned a unit for evaluating analog values.
S7_m_c
IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB and SFB IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB and SFB IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB and SFB
S7_shortcut
Any 2 characters, for example, W, Y Unit, for example, liters
S7_unit
3-11
Table 3-3 Attribute S7_string_0
System Attributes for Parameters, continued Value Any 16 characters, , for example, OPEN When to Assign the Attribute When the parameter is assigned text for evaluating binary values Permitted Declaration type IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB, SFB, FC, and SFC IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB, SFB, FC, and SFC IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB, SFB, FC, and SFC IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB, SFB, FC, and SFC IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB, SFB, FC, and SFC IN/OUT / IN_OUT, only with blocks of the type FB, SFB, FC, and SFC
S7_string_1
Any 16 characters, , for example, CLOSE
When the parameter is assigned text for evaluating binary values
S7_visible
true, false
When you do not want the parameter to be displayed in CFC.
S7_link
true, false
When you do not want the parameter to be linked in CFC.
S7_dynamic
true, false
When you want the parameter to have dynamic capability when testing in CFC.
S7_param
true, false
When you want the parameter to be protected from incorrect value assignment in CFC.
3-12
3.7
Editing the Code Section Overview
Code Section
In the code section you describe the program sequence of your logic block. To do this, you form networks from Ladder elements. In most cases, the code section of a logic block is made up of several networks. After you have entered a Ladder element, the editor runs a check and shows you if any entries were incorrect (errors are shown in red). Elements placed incorrectly are rejected with an error message.
Editable Parts of the Code Section
In a code section, you can edit the block title, network titles, block comments, network comments, and, of course, the statements within the networks.
Block title Block comment
FB6 : Traffic Light Controlling a set of traffic lights for a pedestran crossing on a main street.
Network 1 : Red request for road traffic
Network comment Ladder elements Network title
The red request from road traffic is activated by a start input when the time between two red phases for road traffic is running. #starter #condition #t_next_red_car #t_dur_r_car #condition
Network 2 : Green for road traffic The traffic lights turn green when there is no request for red.
#condition
#g_car
Figure 3-6
Structure of the Code Section
3-13
Entering New Blocks
The order in which you perform each of the following steps is not fixed. When programming the code section of a new block, we recommend you proceed as follows:
Enter block title (optional)
Enter block comment (optional)
Edit networks Enter network title (optional)
Enter network comment (optional)
Enter Ladder elements
Figure 3-7
Editing the Code Section
You can make changes either in the insert or the overwrite mode. Toggle between the insert and overwrite mode using the INSERT key.
3-14
3.8
Basic Guidelines for Entering Ladder Logic Instructions
Overview
A Ladder network can contain several elements in different branches. All elements and branches must be connected together; however, the power rail on the left does not count as a connection (IEC 1131-3). When you program in Ladder, you must observe certain guidelines. Any errors are reported with an error message in the Program Editor.
Ending a Ladder Network
Every Ladder network must end with a coil or a box. You cannot use the following elements to close a network:
S Comparison boxes S Midline outputs (#) S Positive (P) or Negative (N) RLO edge detection
Power Flow
Branches that cause reverse power flow (from right to left) cannot be edited. Figure 3-8 shows an example. With signal state 0 at I 1.4, a power flow from right to left would be possible at I 6.8. This is not allowed.
I 1.0
I 1.2
I 1.4
I 4.2
Q 6.0
Q 2.6
I 6.8

Figure 3-8
Illegal Power Flow

I 2.8
Q 4.4
Power Flow in Reverse Direction (Illegal)
3-15
Short Circuit
You cannot create branches that cause a short circuit. Figure 3-9 shows an example:
I 1.0
I 1.2
I 1.4
Q 6.0

Illegal Short Circuit
Figure 3-9
Short Circuit in a Ladder Network (Illegal)
Placing Boxes
The starting point of a branch for a box connection must always be the left power rail. Logic or other boxes can, however, exist in the branch before the box. Boxes must not be placed within a T-branch. Exceptions to this are compare boxes. Figure 3-10 shows an example:
I 1.0
I 1.2
I 1.4
Q 6.0
T branch
Box

Figure 3-10 Box in a T-Branch (Illegal)
Box illegal at this position
Placing Coils
Coils are automatically placed at the right end of a network where they form the branch end. Exceptions: Coils for Midline Outputs (#) and Positive (P) or Negative (N) RLO Edge Detection cannot be placed on the extreme left or the extreme right of a branch. Nor are they permitted in parallel branches.
3-16
Some coils require preceding logic and some coils cannot accept preceding logic.
S Coils requiring preceding logic:

Output Coil ( ), Set Coil (S), Reset Coil (R) Midline Outputs (#) and Positive (P) or Negative (N) RLO Edge Detection. All Counter and Timer Coils Jump-If-Not (JMPN) Master Control Relay On (MCR<) Save RLO to BR Memory (SAVE) Return (RET)
S Coils that do not accept preceding logic:

Master Control Relay Activate (MCRA) Master Control Relay Deactivate (MCRD) Open Data Block (OPN) Master Control Relay Off (MCR>) All other coils can accept preceding logic but do not require it. The following coils must not be used as parallel outputs: Jump-If-Not (JMPN) Jump (JMP) Call FC SFC from Coil (CALL) Return (RET)
Enable Input/Enable Output Removing and Changing
Passing power to (activating) the enable input EN or the enable output ENO of a logic box is possible but not necessary.
If a branch only consists of one instruction, deleting this instruction removes the whole branch. If you remove a box, all branches connected to the box with logic inputs, with the exception of the main branch, are removed. The overwrite mode is ideal for exchanging elements of the same type (see Section 3.13).
3-17
3.9
Entering Ladder Elements
Handling Networks
To select a network to allow you to enter LAD elements, click the network name (for example, Network 1). When a network is selected you can, for example, cut it, paste it again, or copy it. To create a new network, select the menu command Insert " Network or click the corresponding button in the toolbar. The new network is inserted below the selected network. It only consists of one branch and one coil. If you enter more elements than can be displayed on the screen, the network is shifted to the left of the screen. To obtain a better overview, you can adjust the display with the menu command View " Zoom In/Zoom Out/Zoom Factor.
Selecting Objects in Networks
You go into a network by clicking a Ladder element with the mouse. Within a network you can, in principle, select three areas with a mouse click:
S Ladder elements, for example, a contact or a box S Junction points S Empty instructions (lines or open branches)
You can select one area at a time with one mouse click. (Figure 3-11 shows examples of selections. Here, a number of selections are shown simultaneously.)
#condition
#t_dur_y_car
#r_ped
#t_dur_g_ped
#condition
Figure 3-11
Possible Selections in a Ladder Network
You can choose the color of the selections yourself by selecting the menu command Options " Customize to open the LAD/FBD tabbed page.
3-18
Entering Ladder Logic Elements
The following options are available for inserting Ladder elements:
S Enter a normally open contact, normally closed contact, or coil using the
function keys F2, F3, or F4.
S Click on the button for a normally open contact, normally closed contact,
or coil from the toolbar.
S Select an element from the Insert " LAD Element... menu. S Select elements from the list box in the Program Elements dialog (see
Figure 3-12). To display this dialog box, use the menu command Insert " Program Element..., the button in the toolbar, or the function key F11.
FB6-<Offline> - LAD/STL/FBD Programming S7 Blocks File Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options & Window > 1 = Help Object Block Template Data Type Declaration Row Network FB6-<Offline> Program Elements LAD Element FB6 : Traffic light Network 1 : Red request for road traffic #starter #t_next_red_car #t_dur_r_car #condition Program Elements Bit logic #g car
#condition
Network 2 : Green for cars #condition
Compare Convert Network 2 : Start permanent amber for road traffic Counters S_CD #condition S_CU SE S_CUD DB Call Real Number Fct. Floating Point Number
<
Press F1 for help.
Insert
Figure 3-12
Inserting a Ladder Element Using the Program Elements Dialog Box
Ladder elements are always inserted behind the currently selected element.
3-19
Note If you select the group FB Blocksor FC Blocks in the Program Elements list box, all the corresponding blocks in the S7 program are listed below. If you select the group SFC Blocks or SFB Blocks, all the system function blocks or system functions available on the CPU will be listed. If you select the group Libraries in the Program Elements list box, the STEP 7 standard libraries and any libraries you have created will be listed. In this way you can include whole blocks in your network and program calls for other blocks very quickly.
Calling Multiple Instances
You can also call multiple instances as Ladder elements if you have defined them in the variable declaration table. To do this, select the menu command Insert "Program Element. In the list box of the Ladder elements, you will find the group Multiple Instances under which all declared multiple instances are listed.
3-20
3.10 Creating Parallel Branches
Application
To create OR instructions in the Ladder programming language, you need to create parallel branches.
Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to edit parallel branches: S Draw OR branches from left to right
S Parallel branches are opened downwards and closed upwards S Open a parallel branch with the menu command Insert " LAD Element...
"
Open Branch, with function key F8 or with the corresponding button in the toolbar.
S Close a parallel branch with the menu command Insert " LAD
Element... " Close Branch, with function key F9 or with the corresponding button in the toolbar.
S A parallel branch is always opened in front of the selected element S A parallel branch is always closed after the selected element S To delete a parallel branch, delete all the elements in the branch. When
the last element in the branch is deleted, the OR branch is automatically removed.
Creating New Branches
If you want to open a new branch, select the starting point of the branch below which you want to insert a new branch. You create the new branch with F8 (see Figure 3-13).
Creating a Closed Branch
To create a closed branch, select the element in front of which you want to open a parallel branch. Open the parallel branch with F8, insert the Ladder elements and close the branch again with F9. When you close parallel branches, the necessary empty elements are added. If necessary, the branches are arranged so that branch crossovers are avoided. If you close the branch directly from the parallel branch, the branch is closed after the next possible Ladder element. Figure 3-13 shows an example of how to create a parallel branch using only function keys and buttons in the toolbar.
3-21
Step 1.
M2.0
I1.0
Step 2.
M2.0
I1.0
or <F8> Step 3.
M2.0 I1.0
??.?
or <F2> Step 4.
M2.0 I1.0
??.?
or <F9>
Figure 3-13
Creating Parallel Branches in a Ladder Network
Separating Closed Parallel Branches
You can separate a closed parallel branch by cutting out the intersection point where the parallel branch rejoins the main branch.
3-22
3.11 Editing Addresses and Parameters
Uses
The Block Editor uses the character string ??:? as placeholders for addresses and parameters when you insert a Ladder instruction. All addresses and parameters must be completed correctly for an executable code section. The exceptions to this are FBs and SFBs or timer and counter boxes that do not need to have all parameters assigned. Addresses and parameters can be entered in absolute or symbolic form.
Procedure
To edit an address or a parameter, open the corresponding text box by clicking the placeholders ??.?. When you have completed your entry its syntax is checked. If errors are found, the address or parameter is displayed in red and an error message appears in the status bar. If the syntax is correct, the next text box which has not yet been edited is opened.
Step 1. ??.?
Step 2. m1.6
Step 3. M1.6
Figure 3-14
Entering Addresses for Ladder Instructions
As you become familiar with the editing tools in Ladder, you can enter all elements in a network first, and later assign the address or a parameter, to each element.
Debugging
Because they are marked in red, errors are easy to recognize. To allow you to navigate more easily to errors located outside the currently visible screen section, the Editor has two search functions: Edit " Go To... " Previous Error/Next Error which can also be activated from buttons in the toolbar. The error search extends beyond the network. This means errors are found throughout the entire code section and not just within the network or currently visible section of the program. If you activate the status bar with the menu command View " Status Bar, information about the errors will be displayed in the status bar. You can correct errors and make changes in the overwrite mode (see Section 3.13).
3-23
3.12 Symbolic Addressing
Using Symbolic Addressing
In the Ladder programming language you can either enter absolute addresses, parameters and block names, or use symbols. Using the menu command View " Symbolic Representation, you can switch between symbolic and absolute addressing.
Specifying Symbols
To use shared symbols, you must enter them in the symbol table as follows:
S Open the symbol table with the menu command Options " Symbol
Table.
S Using the menu command Options " Edit Symbols open a dialog box in
which you can define and modify individual symbols. For further information about editing symbols, refer to the User Manual /231/.
Representation
In most cases it is not necessary to define whether a symbol is local or shared. However, in cases where confusion might arise, for example if the same symbol is being used in both the symbol table and the variable declaration table, you can distinguish between the symbols as follows:
S Symbols from the symbol table are shown between inverted commas ... S Symbols from the variable declaration table of the block are preceded by
the hash character #. You do not enter the ID with .. or # yourself. If the symbolic address is contained in the variable declaration table or in the symbol table, the ID is completed after the syntax check.
Symbol Information Made Easy
To make programming with symbolic addressing easier, you can display the absolute address and symbol comment for a symbol. You display this information with the menu command View " Symbol Information. If you choose this option, a text box is displayed after each network. You cannot edit in this view. Any modifications you require must be made in the symbol table or the variable declaration table.
3-24
PROJ1\...\FB53-<Offline>
Network 1 : Output alarm An alarm is output when the temperature limit is exceeded and the message is not acknowledged sensor1 button2 lampon
Symbol Information: I0.0 I1.2 Q4.0 sensor1 button2 lampon Temperature exceeded Acknowledge button Alarm signal
Figure 3-15
Symbol Information in Ladder
When you print the block, the printout is the same as the current screen followed by the corresponding instruction and symbol comments. Note When you download a program to the CPU, the symbol table is not downloaded. This means that when you are editing a user program whose original is not on the programming device or PC, the original symbols are no longer available.
3-25
3.13 Editing in the Overwrite Mode
Overwriting Addresses and Parameters
In the Block Editor you can change addresses or parameters conveniently using the overwrite mode. You toggle between insert and overwrite mode using the INSERT key. You then overwrite your entries in the text boxes for addresses or parameters.
Overwriting Ladder Elements
The overwrite mode allows you to overwrite Ladder elements of the same type. All boolean logic connections and parameters are retained. This has the advantage that you do not have to enter the addresses and parameters again. The Ladder element you want to overwrite can only be replaced by a Ladder element of the same type. For example, you can exchange a normally open contact for a normally closed contact, an R/S flipflop for an S/R flipflop or exchange one timer for another. To overwrite an existing Ladder element, select it and switch to the overwrite mode with the INSERT key. The Ladder element is overwritten as soon as you insert another Ladder element of the same type.
T1 I 0.0 I 1.1 S I 0.1 S5T#10s I 1.2 TV R I 0.2 Overwrite S_ODT Q BI BCD MW 2 MW 4 Q 1.0
T1 I 0.0 I 1.1 S I 0.1 S5T#10s I 1.2 TV R I 0.2 S_PULSE Q BI BCD MW 2 MW 4 Q 1.0
Figure 3-16
Overwriting Boxes
3-26
Special Case: Splitting a Junction
If at one point in a branch one parallel branch closes and another one opens, this is called a junction. You can split a junction by selecting it at the lower or upper junction point and inserting a Ladder element. The junction is split and the Ladder element inserted.
M4.0
I6.0
Q2.4
I8.0
M4.6
Overwrite
M4.0
??.?
I6.0
Q2.4
I8.0
M4.6
Figure 3-17
Splitting a Junction
Note You can correct comments and titles in overwrite mode.
3-27
3.14 Entering Titles and Comments
Overview
In the code section of a logic block, you can enter information such as block and network titles, and block and network comments. These entries are optional and not essential to the program execution.
Entering Block Titles and Network Titles
To enter a block title or network title, position the cursor on the three question marks to the right of the block name or network name (for example, network 1 : ???). A text box is then opened in which you enter the title. This can be up to 64 characters long.
1.
Network 2: ???
Mouse click
2.
Network 2:
Network title
Figure 3-18
Entering Block Titles
Entering Comments
Using the View " Comment menu command, you can display or hide the gray comment field. When you double-click the comment field, a text box appears which you can use to enter comments. You have 64 Kbytes per block available for block comments and network comments.
1.
???
Mouse click Comment for network or block
2.
Figure 3-19
Entering Comments
Note When you download a block to the CPU, the comments are not downloaded. If you then upload a block from the CPU, whose original is not on your programming device or PC, you cannot view or edit the original comments.
3-28
Creating Data Blocks and User-Defined Data Types
In This Chapter
Data blocks are an important part of your user program since they contain all its data. This chapter explains how to create data blocks. User-defined data types (UDTs) are not essential for programming. However, they can be real time-savers in situations where you have to write programs for similar tasks.
Chapter Overview
Section 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Description Creating Data Blocks - Overview Selecting a Method Editing the Declaration Table Editing Actual Data Values Creating User-Defined Data Types (UDTs)
Page 4-2 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-8
4-1
4.1
Creating Data Blocks Overview
Data Blocks
Data blocks (DBs) are used to handle data which is why they do not have a code section. Programming data blocks involves the following :
S Declaration table: The declaration table is where you specify the data
structure of the data block.
S Block properties: These include extra information such as time stamp,

programming language and path name, which is all entered by the system itself. You can also add information about the name, family, version and author and you can assign system attributes for blocks (see Chapter 5).
Types of Data Blocks
A user program can have the following data blocks:
S Shared DBs can be accessed by all logic blocks in the program. The data
remains stored in the data block even when it has been closed. If you require several shared DBs of the same data structure, you can create them with the help of a UDT. These are data blocks with an associated user-defined data type.
S Instance DBs are associated with specific function blocks and are
structured according to the declaration table of the FB. You can only create an instance DB if the corresponding function block exists. They are data blocks with an associated function block.
Methods of Creating Data Blocks
Depending on the type of data block you want to create, different methods are used. Shared data blocks can be created as follows:
S Define the structure for a single data block. For this you must define the
variables and data types in the desired order. This structure only applies to this DB.
S Define the structure for the data block with the help of a user-defined data
type. In this case the UDT structure defines the data structure of the DB. A user data type can be assigned to a number of data blocks. Create an instance data block and then:
S Assign an existing function block to the data block. In this case the
declaration section of the function block defines the structure of the data block. A number of instance data blocks can be assigned to one function block.
4-2
Note When you change the declaration section of an FB, you have to recreate all the instance data blocks associated with it in order to ensure their compatibility. The same applies to data blocks which have been created on the basis of a UDT.
Create a data block (DB) in the SIMATIC Manager or in the Editor
LAD Editor Select the desired method ...
... Declaration for a single data block.
... Assign to a UDT.
... Assign the DB to an FB.
Edit the declaration table. Shared DB Instance DB
Edit the block properties.
Save the block.
Figure 4-1
Programming Procedure for Creating Data Blocks
4-3
4.2
Selecting a Method
Procedure
When you create a DB in the SIMATIC Manager or in the LAD Editor, you must select the method you want to use. You are prompted to select the method in a dialog box.
New Data Block Block: Programming Tool: Create Data Block Data Block Referencing a User-Defined Data Type Data Block Referencing a Function Block Reference: FB6 FB88 FB101 DB7 DB Editor
OK
Cancel
Help
Figure 4-2
Selecting a Method and Assigning an FB/UDT
When creating a DB based on either a UDT or as an instance data block of an FB, you make your selection in the list box that displays all existing UDTs and FBs. The UDT or FB must already exist.
How to Proceed
How you proceed from here depends on whether you are creating the DB by assigning it or by creating a single declaration.
S Since the assigned UDT or FB defines the structure of the data block, you
have actually already created the new data block. The declaration table is displayed on your screen, but no further changes can be made to it.
S If you are defining the structure of a shared data block, you must now edit
the declaration table, declaring the variable names and data type and, if you require, the initial value and comment (see Section 4.3).
4-4
4.3
Editing the Declaration Table
Purpose of the Declaration View
When you create single shared data blocks or UDTs, you must declare their elements (variables) and their data types. For this you use the declaration table in the declaration view. When working with data blocks, you change to this view with the menu command View " Declaration View. This does not apply to data blocks assigned to a UDT or FB since the declaration is already defined by the UDT or FB.
Structure of the Table in the Declaration View
The declaration view of a data block shows the addresses, the declaration types (only for instance DBs), the variable names (symbols), initial values and comments. Figure 4-3 shows an example:
DB15 - <Offline>
Address 0.0 +0.0 +2.0 +6.0 +10.0 +10.1 =12.0 speed runtime history motor_on motor_off Symbol Data Type STRUCT INT DINT REAL BOOL BOOL END_STRUCT 100 L#0 0.000000e+000 FALSE FALSE Maximum RPM Initial Value Comment
Figure 4-3
Declaring a Data Block
The columns have the same significance as those in the declaration table for logic blocks (see Section 3.3). Procedure To enter a new declaration, type in the required declaration type, variable name, data type, initial value (optional) and comment (optional). You can move the cursor from one cell to the next using the TAB or RETURN keys. At the end of each row, an address is allocated to the variable. The syntax is checked after each cell has been edited and errors are shown in red. You can continue to make your entries and correct any errors later. Note Editing in the declaration view is the same as editing the variable declaration table of logic blocks (see Section 3.4). The editing and input procedures are identical and you should also proceed in the same way when entering arrays or structures.
4-5
4.4
Editing Actual Data Values
Initial Value Actual Value
When you create and save a data block for the first time, the declared (optional) initial value is automatically assumed as the actual value of the variable. When it accesses the data block, the user program continues to use this as the actual value, unless you explicitly specify a new actual value for the variable in the user program. The actual values of the variables are changed by the logic blocks writing to them while the CPU program is being executed. You can display and change the actual values of variables yourself.
Data View of Data Blocks
You must switch to the data view to display and edit actual data values in data blocks. Open a data block and use the menu command View " Data View to switch to the data view. The only difference between the data view and the declaration view of a data block is the additional column Actual Value. In the data view, the elements of variables with a complex data type are displayed individually and with their complete symbolic name, so that each of their actual values can be displayed and edited (see Figure 4-4).
DB17 - <Offline>
Address Symbol 0.0 motor.speed 2.0 motor.runtime 6.0 motor.history 10.0 motor.motor_on 10.1 motor.motor_off 12.0 field[1] 14.0 field[2] 16.0 field[3] Type Initial Value Actual Value Comment INT 100 89 L#0 Maximum RPM DINT L#0
REAL 0.000000e+000 0.000000e+000 BOOL FALSE BOOL FALSE INT INT INT 0 0 0 TRUE FALSE 7 4 8
Figure 4-4
Data Block in the Data View
Displayed Actual Value
The displayed actual value is either the value that the variable had when you opened the data block or the most recently modified and saved value. Note If you open data blocks online, the actual value is not updated cyclically.
4-6
Changing and Reinitializing Actual Values
You can overwrite the actual values in the Actual Value column. The values you enter must be compatible with the data type. Using the menu command Edit " Initialize Data Block you can reinitialize the whole data block. This overwrites the actual values of the variables with the initial values which you declared in the declaration view or those which you declared in the FB or UDT.
Saving Actual Values
The actual values are only activated and become valid when you save them.
S To save the actual data values that you changed offline, select the menu
command File " Save or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Even if the data block was opened online, only the data block that exists offline will be saved.
S To download the modified data values to the CPU, select the menu
command PLC " Download or click the button in the toolbar.
4-7
4.5
Creating User-Defined Data Types (UDTs)
Overview
User-defined data types are data structures that you create yourself and save as blocks. Once defined, you can use them under their absolute or symbolic block names, throughout the entire user program. You can use UDTs as follows:
S Like elementary or complex data types as the data type in the declaration
of logic blocks (FCs, FBs, OBs) or in data blocks (DBs).
S As templates for creating data blocks with the same data structure.
Procedure
Figure 4-5 shows the basic procedure for creating a user data type:
Create a block for a UDT in the SIMATIC Manager or in the Editor LAD Editor
Edit the declaration table
Edit the block properties
Save the block
Figure 4-5
Creating a User Data Type
Editing a Declaration Table
After creating or opening a UDT in the SIMATIC Manager or the incremental editor, a declaration table is displayed in which you declare the structure of the data type.
4-8
UDT56 - <Offline>
Address 0.0 +0.0 +2.0 +6.0 +10.0 +10.1 =12.0 speed runtime history motor_on motor_off Symbol Data Type STRUCT INT DINT REAL BOOL BOOL END_STRUCT 100 L#0 0.000000e+000 FALSE FALSE Maximum RPM Initial Value Comment
Figure 4-6
Declaring a UDT
The first and the final row of the declaration view of a UDT are already allocated and display the key words STRUCT and END_STRUCT, which define the beginning and end of a UDT. These rows cannot be edited. Initially, two empty rows are displayed to allow you to declare your variables. You must enter the variable name and data type. Initial value or comments are optional. You can create more empty rows using the menu command Insert " Declaration Row " Before Selection / After Selection. Note Editing this declaration table is similar to editing the declaration table of logic and data blocks.
4-9
4-10
Editing the Block Properties and Testing the Program
In This Chapter
After you have created and edited the data blocks and logic blocks, you should check and edit the block properties. They contain information that identifies the block and indicates how and when it was created. This information can be useful when debugging a program. The Ladder Editor allows you to test a single block while it is being executed in a user program on the CPU. You can follow the signal flow within networks on the screen. This program test, known as Program Status, helps you check various processes and eliminate errors.
Chapter Overview
Section 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
Description Editing the Block Properties Testing your Ladder Program - Overview Setting the Program Status Setting the Trigger Conditions Choosing a Test Environment and Starting/Stopping the Program Status
Page 5-2 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8
5-1
5.1
Editing the Block Properties
Overview
The block properties contain additional information about the block. Optional data such as name, family, version and author of the block can be entered here. The properties also include other statistical data and further information, automatically entered by the system, which cannot be edited by the user (see Figure 5-1). You can also assign system attributes to the block. The block properties provide you with important information about the block type, memory requirements and time of the last modification. This can be useful when trying to track down errors, such as insufficient memory and time stamp conflicts.
Procedure
The block properties can be edited using a dialog box.
S In the SIMATIC Manager, select the block and select the menu command
Edit " Object Properties.
S Select File " Properties when opening a block in the Ladder Editor.
Properties - Block GeneralPart1 GeneralPart2 System Attributes Internal ID: Type: Symbol: Symbol Comment: Project Path: FB6 Language: LAD
Function Block (FB) Symbol from traffic light Traffic light on Main Street Traffic\Traffic light\User Program\FB6
Name (Header): Family: Author: Last Modified: Code: Interface:
Traffic Traffic Meier
Version: Block Version: Multiple Instance DB
01.00 3.000
25.10.96 15:23:41.190 25.10.96 15:23:41.190
OK
Cancel
Help
Figure 5-1 Setting the Display of the Program Status in Ladder
In the tabbed pages General Part 1, General Part 2, and System Attributes, you can make a number of entries including the following:
5-2
Block Name and Family
Blocks with a name and family are easier to classify. For example you could allocate some blocks to the Closed-Loop Controller family, showing that they are all used for programming closed-loop controllers. When the block is called later in the code section of another Ladder block, the benefits of this information become apparent: the family and name of the block are displayed in the Program Elements list box when this block is selected, so that you can identify the purpose of the block more easily.
Block Release
This information shows you which STEP 7 version was used to create a block. Version 1 blocks must be converted before they can be incorporated in a program of version 3. You can achieve this in the SIMATIC Manager by using the menu command File " Open Old Version 1 Project Blocks created with version 1 cannot be used in conjunction with multiple instances. They must be decompiled into source files and then be compiled into version 3 blocks. For further information, refer to the User Manual /231/.
Block Attributes
Block attributes in the General Part 2 tabbed page include entries such as the following:
S The attribute DB write-protected in PLC means that the block is

write-protected. This is useful for data blocks containing constant values that must not be changed. The DB must exist as an STL source file.
S The attribute Know How Protect indicates a protected block and has
the following effects: The code section cannot be viewed. The variable declaration table does not display the temporary and static variables. STL source files cannot be generated from the block. Block properties cannot be edited.
S The attribute Standard block means a protected standard Siemens

block. It appears on the bottom left of the page.
S The attribute Unlinked only occurs with to data blocks. It indicates that
the data block cannot be downloaded from the load memory to the work memory of the CPU. Data blocks in the load memory can only be accessed using SFCs which copy the content of the data blocks to the work memory. A more effective use of the work memory is achieved as it only contains relevant data during the run time.
5-3
Note Attributes such as block protection, write protection and unlinked can only be added to the block if it is being programmed as a source file in STL. If you have created your block in Ladder, you must change to the programming language STL using the menu command View " STL. You must then convert the block into a source file before entering these attributes. Once the source files are compiled into blocks the blocks are protected according to the attributes you have selected. Further information can be found in the STL Reference Manual /232/.
System Attributes for Blocks

Table 5-1 Attribute S7_m_c S7_tasklist
To configure the process control and process diagnostics, you can assign the following system attributes in the System Attributes tabbed page.
System Attributes for Process Control Configuration Value true, false taskname1, taskname2, etc. big, small When to Assign the Attribute When the block will be manipulated or monitored from an operator panel. When the block will be called in organization blocks other than in cyclic OBs (for example in error or startup OBs). Permitted Block Type FB, SFB FB, SFB, FC, SFC
S7_blockview
To specify whether the block is displayed in large FB, SFB, FC, SFC or small format.
Table 5-2 Attribute S7_pdiag S7_pdiag_ unit S7_pdiag_ motion
System Attributes for Process Diagnostics Value true, false true, false When to Assign the Attribute When the block will generate information relevant to process diagnostics. When the block will generate information relevant to process diagnostics and a unit of measurement will be monitored. Permitted Block Type FB, FC, OB, DB UDT
true, false
When the block will generate information UDT relevant to process diagnostics and a motion will be monitored.
5-4
5.2
Testing your Ladder Program - Overview
Test Method
You can test your Ladder program by visually displaying the signal flow within the network of a block. The display of the program is updated cyclically.
Prior Conditions
You can only display the program status when the following conditions are met:
S The block was saved and downloaded to the CPU without any errors. S The CPU is in operation and the user program is running. S You have opened the block online.
Basic Procedure Figure 5-2 shows the basic procedure for monitoring the program status:
Open block online
Make settings for test display
Set trigger conditions (optional)
Select test environment
Start/stop test
Figure 5-2
Procedure for Testing Logic Blocks in Ladder
5-5
5.3
Setting the Program Status
Procedure
Before starting the Ladder program test, you select the criteria you would like to see displayed. To do this use the menu command Options " Customize and open the Ladder Logic tabbed page.
LAD/STL/FBD Editor Layout DIN A4 Landscape LAD: Width of Address Field 18 Line/Color For: Line Thickness Thin Medium Thick Select Status fulfilled Color (10-24) FBD: Deep (2D) Deep (3D) STL LAD/FBD Create Block Source Files
Element Representation
OK
Cancel
Help
Figure 5-3 Setting the Display for the Program Status in Ladder
In this tabbed page, you now select the color and line thickness for the two possible results:
S Status not fulfilled: the conditions along the current path have not been
fulfilled. No current is flowing (dotted line).
S Status fulfilled: the conditions along the current path have been
fulfilled. Current is flowing (solid line).
5-6
5.4
Setting the Trigger Conditions
Background
By setting the trigger condition you select the call environment of the block to be tested. The test will not take place unless the trigger condition is fulfilled.
Procedure
The trigger conditions can be set by using the menu command Debug " Call Environment.
Block Call Environment Trigger Condition No Condition Call Path 1st Block: 2nd Block: 3rd Block: Block Status: Open Data Blocks Global DB Number: Instance DB Number: DB6 FB6
OK
Cancel
Help
Figure 5-4
Setting the Trigger Conditions
Trigger Condition Settings and their Meanings
The three possible settings have the following meanings:
S No trigger conditions: The call environment of the block being tested is

irrelevant. This means that if a block is called at various points during the program, you will not be able to distinguish which status applied to which call.
S Call path: This is the call path used for calling the block in order to
trigger a status display. You can enter three block nesting levels before the tested block is reached.
S Open data blocks: In this case the call environment is defined by one or
two data blocks. A status display is triggered when the block currently being tested is called in association with one of these data blocks.
5-7
5.5
Choosing a Test Environment and Starting/Stopping the Program Status

There are two ways of testing your program online.
Selecting a Test Environment
S The process test environment tests your program online, in a working

process. The status of the statements in programmed loops that are run through more than once in the scan cycle is stopped at the return jump to the start of the loop and is no longer updated while the loop is visible. This mode causes the least load on the cycle.
S In the test environment laboratory your program is also tested online

under laboratory conditions. In this case, however, the status of statements in programmed loops that are run through more than once in the scan cycle is shown after the end of each loop. This mode can take up considerable scan time depending on the number of loop iterations and the number of tested statements. You can select the test environment using the menu command Debug " Test Environment " Laboratory/Process.
Starting and Stopping the Program Status
The program status is started and stopped by using the command Debug " Monitor. The program status is only displayed for the area currently visible in the editor.
FB6-<Online>
Address 0.0 2.0 4.0 Decl. in in in Symbol dur_g_p del_r_p starter Data Type S5TIME S5TIME BOOL Initial Value S5T#0MS S5T#0MS FALSE Comment
FB6 : Traffic Light Network 1 #starter #condition #t_next_red_car #t_dur_r_car #condition
Network 2: Green for road traffic #condition #g car
Network 3: Start duration of yellow for road traffic #condition #t_dur_y_car SD S5T#3S S5T#3S
Figure 5-5
Program Status in Ladder (Example)
5-8
Checking the Scan Time
Activating the test mode increases the scan time. If the set scan time is exceeded, the CPU switches to STOP unless you have programmed OB80. You can display and check the currently set scan time using the menu command PLC " Module Information. If necessary, you can change the maximum scan time in the CPU properties for test purposes when assigning hardware parameters.
5-9
5-10
Part 2: Language Description
Configuration and Elements of Ladder Logic Addressing Bit Logic Instructions Timer Instructions Counter Instructions Integer Math Instructions Floating-Point Math Instructions Comparison Instructions Transfer and Conversion Instructions Word Logic Instructions Shift and Rotate Instructions Data Block Instructions Jump Instructions Status Bit Instructions Program Control Instructions
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5-2
Configuration and Elements of Ladder Logic

Chapter Overview
Section 6.1 6.2 6.3 Description Elements and Box Structure Boolean Logic and Truth Tables Significance of the CPU Registers in Instructions
6
Page 6-2 6-6 6-12
6-1
6.1
Elements and Boxes
Ladder Instructions
Ladder instructions consist of elements and boxes which are connected graphically to form networks. The elements and boxes can be classified into the following groups:
Instructions as Elements
STEP 7 represents some ladder logic instructions as individual elements that need no address or parameters (see Table 6-1).
Table 6-1 Ladder Logic Instruction as Elements without Addresses or Parameters Element NOT Name Invert Power Flow Section in This Manual 8.6
Instructions as Elements with Address
STEP 7 represents some ladder logic instructions as individual elements for which you need to enter an address (see Table 6-2). For more information on addressing, see Chapter 7.
Table 6-2 Ladder Logic Instruction as an Element with an Addres Element <Address> Name Normally Open Contact Section in This Manual 8.2
Instructions as Elements with Address and Value
STEP 7 represents some ladder logic instructions as individual elements for which you need to enter an address and a value (such as a time or count value, see Table 6-3). For more information on addressing, see Chapter 7.
Table 6-3 Ladder Logic Instruction as an Element with an Address and Value Element <Address> SS Value Name Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Section in This Manual
8.16
6-2
Instructions as Boxes with Parameters
STEP 7 represents some ladder logic instructions as boxes with lines indicating inputs and outputs (see Table 6-4). The inputs are on the left side of the box; the outputs are on the right side of the box. You fill in the input parameters. For the output parameters, you fill in locations where the STEP 7 software can place output information for you. You must use the specific notation of the individual data types for the parameters. The principle of the enable in (EN) and enable out (ENO) parameters is explained below. For more information on input and output parameters, see the description of each instruction in this manual.
Table 6-4 Ladder Logic Instruction as Box with Inputs and Outputs Box Name Section in This Manual
DIV_R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT Divide Real 12.5
Enable In and Enable Out Parameters
Passing power to (activating) the enable input (EN) of a ladder logic box causes the box to carry out a specific function. If the box is able to execute its function without error, the enable output (ENO) passes power along the circuit. The ladder logic box parameters EN and ENO are of data type BOOL and can be in memory area I, Q, M, D, or L (see Tables 6-5 and 6-6). EN and ENO function according to the following principles:
S If EN is not activated (that is, if it has a signal state of 0), the box does
not carry out its function and ENO is not activated (that is, it also has a signal state of 0).
S If EN is activated (that is, if it has a signal state of 1) and the box to

which EN belongs executes its function without error, ENO is also activated (that is, it also has a signal state of 1).
S If EN is activated (that is, if it has a signal state of 1) and an error occurs

while the box to which EN belongs is executing its function, ENO is not activated (that is, its signal state is 0).
Restrictions for Boxes and Inline Coils Memory Areas and Their Functions
You cannot place a box or an inline coil in a ladder logic rung which does not start at the left power rail. The Compare instructions are an exception.
Most of the addresses in LAD relate to memory areas. The following table shows the types and their functions.
6-3
Table 6-5 Name of Area Process-image input
Memory Areas and Their Functions Function of Area At the beginning of the scan cycle, the operating system reads the inputs from the process and records the values in this area. The program can use these values in its cyclic processing. During the scan cycle, the program calculates output values and places them in this area. At the end of the scan cycle, the operating system reads the calculated output values from this area and sends them to the process outputs. This area provides storage for interim results calculated in the program. Access to Area via Units of the following size: Input bit Input byte Input word Input double word Output bit Output byte Output word Output double word Memory bit Memory byte Memory word Memory double word Peripheral input byte Peripheral input word Peripheral input double word Peripheral output byte Peripheral output word Peripheral output double word Timers are function elements of Ladder programming. This area provides storage for timer cells. In this area, clock timing accesses time cells to update them by decrementing the time value. Timer instructions access time cells here. Timer (T) Abbrev. I IB IW ID Q QB QW QD M MB MW MD PIB PIW PID PQB PQW PQD T
Process-image output
Bit memory
I/O: external input I/O: external output Timer
This area enables your program to have direct access to input and output modules (that is, peripheral inputs and outputs).
Counter
Counters are function elements of Ladder Counter (C) programming. This area provides storage for counters. Counter instructions access them here. This area contains data that can be accessed from any block. If you need to have two different data blocks open at the same time, you can open one with the statement OPN DB and one with the statement OPN DI. The notation of the addresses, e.g. L DBWi and L DIWi, determines the data block to be accessed. Whil you can use the While h OPN DI statement to open any data block, the principal use of this statement is to open instance data blocks that are associated with function blocks (FBs) and system function blocks (SFBs). For more information on FBs and SFBs, see the STEP 7 Program Design Manual /234/ and the STEP 7 User Manual /231/. This area contains temporary data that is used within a logic block (FB, or FC). These data are also called dynamic local data. They serve as an intermediate buffer. When the logic block is finished, these data are lost. The data are contained in the local data stack (L stack). Data block opened with the statement OPN DB: Data bit Data byte Data word Data double word Data block opened with the statement OPN DI: Data bit Data byte Data word Data double word Temporary local data bit Temporary local data byte Temporary local data word Temporary local data double word
Data block
DBX DBB DBW DBD
DIX DIB DIW DID L LB LW LD
Local data
6-4
Table 6-6 lists the maximum address ranges for various memory areas. For the address range possible with your CPU, refer to the appropriate S7-300 CPU manual.
Table 6-6 Memory Areas and Their Address Ranges Access to Area Name of Area via Units of the Following Size: Abbrev. I IB IW ID Q QB QW QD M MB MW MD PIB PIW PID PQB PQW PQD T C Maximum Address Range 0.0 to 65,535.7 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,534 0 to 65,532 0.0 to 65,535.7 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,534 0 to 65,532 0.0 to 255.7 0 to 255 0 to 254 0 to 252 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,534 0 to 65,532 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,534 0 to 65,532 0 to 255 0 to 255
Process-image input Input bit Input byte Input word Input double word Process-image output Output bit Output byte Output word Output double word Memory bit Memory byte Memory word Memory double word Peripheral input byte Peripheral input word Peripheral input double word Peripheral output byte Peripheral output word Peripheral output double word Timer (T) Counter (C) Data block opened with the statement DB (OPN) Data bit Data byte Data word Data double word Data block opened with the statement DI (OPN) Data bit Data byte Data word Data double word Local data Temporary local data bit Temporary local data byte Temporary local data word Temporary local data double word
Bit memory
Peripheral I/O: External input Peripheral I/O: External output Timer Counter Data block
DBX DBB DBW DBD
0.0 to 65,535.7 0 to 65,535 0 to 65, 534 0 to 65,532
DIX DIB DIW DID L LB LW LD
0.0 to 65,535.7 0 to 65,535 0 to 65, 534 0 to 65,532 0.0 to 65,535.7 0 to 65,535 0 to 65, 534 0 to 65,532
6-5
6.2
Boolean Logic and Truth Tables
Power Flow
A ladder logic program tracks power flow between power rails as it passes through various inputs, outputs, and other elements and boxes. Many Ladder instructions work according to the principles of Boolean logic. Each of the Boolean logic instructions checks the signal state of an electrical contact for 0 (not activated, off) or 1 (activated, on) and produces a result based on the findings. The instruction then either stores this result or uses it to perform a Boolean logic operation. The result of the logic operation is called the RLO. The principles of Boolean logic are demonstrated here on the basis of normally open and normally closed contacts.
Normally Open Contact
Figure 6-1 shows two conditions of a relay logic circuit with one contact between a power rail and a coil. The normal state of this contact is open. If the contact is not activated, it remains open. The signal state of the open contact is 0 (not activated). If the contact remains open, the power from the power rail cannot energize the coil at the end of the circuit. If the contact is activated (signal state of the contact is 1), power will flow to the coil. The circuit on the left in Figure 6-1 shows a normally open control relay contact as it is sometimes represented in relay logic diagrams. For the purpose of this example, the circuit on the right indicates that the contact has been activated and is therefore closed.
Standard Representation Power Rail Normally Open Contact
Representation Indicating Activated Contact
Coil
Figure 6-1
Relay Logic Circuit with Normally Open Control Relay Contact
You can use a Normally Open Contact instruction (see Section 8.2) to check the signal state of a normally open control relay contact. By checking the signal state, the instruction determines whether power can flow across the contact or not. If power can flow, the instruction produces a result of 1; if power cannot flow, the instruction produces a result of 0 (see Table 6-7). The instruction can either store this result or use it to perform a Boolean logic operation.
6-6
Normally Closed Contact
Figure 6-2 shows two representations of a relay logic circuit with one contact between a power rail and a coil. The normal state of this contact is closed. If the contact is not activated, it remains closed. The signal state of the closed contact is 0 (not activated). If the contact remains closed, power from the power rail can cross the contact to energize the coil at the end of the circuit. Activating the contact (signal state of the contact is 1) opens the contact, interrupting the flow of power to the coil. The circuit on the left in Figure 6-2 shows a normally closed control relay contact as it is sometimes represented in relay logic diagrams. For the purpose of this example, the circuit on the right indicates that the contact has been activated and is therefore open.
Standard Representation Power Rail Normally Closed Contact Coil
Representation Indicating Activated Contact
Figure 6-2
Relay Logic Circuit with Normally Closed Control Relay Contact
You can use a Normally Closed Contact instruction (see Section 8.3) to check the signal state of a normally closed control relay contact. By checking the signal state, the instruction determines whether power can flow across the contact or not. If power can flow, the instruction produces a result of 1; if power cannot flow, the instruction produces a result of 0 (see Table 6-7). The instruction can either store this result or use it to perform a Boolean logic operation.
Table 6-7 Instruction 1 0 Result of Signal State Check by Normally Open and Normally Closed Contact Result if Signal State of Contact is 1 (Contact Is Activated) (Available power can flow because the normally open contact is closed.) (Available power cannot flow because the normally closed contact is opened.) 0 1 Result if Signal State of Contact Is 0 (Contact Is Not Activated) (Available power cannot flow because the normally open contact is open.) (Available power can flow because the normally closed contact is closed.)
6-7
Programming Contacts in Series
Figure 6-3 shows a logic string of Ladder instructions that represents two normally open contacts connected in series to a coil. The contacts are labelled I for input and the coil is labelled Q for output. Activating a normally open contact closes the contact. When both contacts in the logic string are activated (that is, closed), power can flow from the power rail across each contact to energize the coil at the end of the circuit. That is, when both contact I 1.0 and I 1.1 are activated, power can flow to the coil. In Diagram 1, both contacts are activated. Activating a normally open contact closes the contact. Power can flow from the power rail across each closed contact to energize the coil at the end of the circuit. In Diagrams 2 and 3, because one of the two contacts is not activated, power cannot flow all the way to the coil. The coil is not energized. In Diagram 4, neither contact is activated. Both contacts remain open. Power cannot flow to the coil. The coil is not energized.
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
Diagram 3
Diagram 4
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
= activated
= energized
Figure 6-3
Using Normally Open Contact to Program Contacts in a Series
6-8
Using Normally Open Contact in Series
Figure 6-3 shows a ladder logic diagram that you can use to program two normally open contacts connected in series to a coil. The first Normally Open Contact instruction in the logic string checks the signal state of the first contact in the series (input I 1.0) and produces a result based on the findings (see Table 6-7). This result can be 1 or 0. A result of 1 means that the contact is closed and any available power could flow across the contact; a result of 0 means that the contact is open, interrupting the flow of any power available at the contact. The first Normally Open Contact instruction copies this 1 or 0 to a memory bit in the status word of the programmable logic controller. This bit is called the result of logic operation (RLO) bit. The second Normally Open Contact instruction in the logic string checks the signal state of the second contact in the series (I 1.1) and produces a result based on the findings (see Table 6-7). This result can be 1 or 0, depending on whether the contact is closed or open. At this point, the second Normally Open Contact instruction performs a Boolean logic combination. The instruction takes the result it produced upon checking the signal state of the second contact and combines this result with the value stored in the RLO bit. The result of this combination (either 1 or 0) is stored in the RLO bit of the status word, replacing the old value stored there. The Output Coil instruction (see Section 8.4) assigns this new value to the coil (output Q 4.0). The possible results of such a logic combination can be shown in a truth table. In such a logic combination, 1 represents true and 0 represents false. The possible Boolean logic combinations and their results are summed up in Table 6-8, where contact is closed and power can flow correspond to true and contact is open and power cannot flow correspond to false (see Figure 6-3 for the contacts).
Table 6-8 Truth Table: And and the result produced by checking the signal state of contact I 1.1 is 1 (contact is closed) 1 (contact is closed) 0 (contact is open) 0 (contact is open) the result of the logic operation shown in Figure 6-3 is 1 (power can flow) 0 (power cannot flow) 0 (power cannot flow) 0 (power cannot flow)
If the result produced by checking the signal state of contact I 1.0 is 1 (contact is closed) 0 (contact is open) 1 (contact is closed) 0 (contact is open)
6-9
Programming Contacts in Parallel
Figure 6-4 shows a logic string of Ladder instructions that represent two normally open contacts connected in parallel to a coil. The contacts are labelled I for input and the coil is labelled Q for output. Activating a normally open contact closes the contact. When either one contact in the logic string (I 1.1) or the other contact in the logic string (I 1.0) is activated (that is, closed), power can flow from the power rail to energize the coil (Q 4.0) at the end of the circuit. If both contacts in the logic string are activated, power can flow from the power rail to energize the coil. In Diagrams 1 and 2, one contact is activated and the other is not. Activating a normally open contact closes the contact. Power can flow from the power rail across the closed contact and continue to the coil at the end of the circuit. Because the two contacts are connected in parallel, only one of the two contacts need be closed for the power flow to continue to the coil at the end of the circuit to energize the coil. In Diagram 3, both contacts are activated, enabling the power to flow across the two closed contacts to the end of the circuit to energize the coil. In Diagram 4, neither contact is activated. Both contacts remain open. Power cannot flow to the coil. The coil is not energized.
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
I 1.0 I 1.1
Q 4.0
I 1.0 I 1.1
Q 4.0
Diagram 3
Diagram 4
I 1.0
Q 4.0
I 1.0 I 1.1
Q 4.0
I 1.1
= activated
= energized
Figure 6-4
Using Normally Open Contact to Program Contacts in Parallel
6-10
Using Normally Open Contact in Parallel
Figure 6-4 shows a ladder logic diagram that you can use to program two normally open contacts connected in parallel to a coil. The first Normally Open Contact instruction in the logic string checks the signal state of the first contact (input I 1.0) and produces a result based on the findings (see Table 6-7). This result can be 1 or 0. A result of 1 means that the contact is closed and any available power could flow across the contact; a result of 0 means that the contact is open, interrupting the flow of any power available at the contact. The first Normally Open Contact instruction copies this 1 or 0 to a memory bit in the status word of the programmable logic controller. This bit is called the result of logic operation (RLO) bit. The second Normally Open Contact instruction in the logic string checks the signal state of the second contact (I 1.1) and produces a result based on the findings (see Table 6-7). This result can be 1 or 0, depending on whether the contact is closed or open. At this point, the second Normally Open Contact instruction performs a Boolean logic combination. The instruction takes the result it produced upon checking the signal state of the second contact and combines this result with the value stored in the RLO bit. The result of this combination (either 1 or 0) is stored in the RLO bit of the status word, replacing the old value stored there. The Output Coil instruction (see Section 8.4) assigns this new value to the coil (output Q 4.0). The possible results of such a logic combination can be shown in a truth table. In such a logic combination, 1 represents true and 0 represents false. The possible Boolean logic combinations and their results are summed up in Table 6-9, where contact is closed and power can flow correspond to true and contact is open and power cannot flow correspond to false (see Figure 6-4 for the contacts).
Table 6-9 Truth Table: Or and the result produced by checking the signal state of contact I 1.1 is 0 (contact is open) 1 (contact is closed) 1 (contact is closed) 0 (contact is open) the result of the logic operation shown in Figure 6-4 is 1 (power can flow) 1 (power can flow) 1 (power can flow) 0 (power cannot flow)
If the result produced by checking the signal state of contact I 1.0 is 1 (contact is closed) 0 (contact is open) 1 (contact is closed) 0 (contact is open)
6-11
6.3
Significance of the CPU Registers in Instructions
Explanation
Registers help the CPU perform logic, math, shift, or conversion operations. These registers are described below.
Accumulators
The two 32-bit accumulators are general purpose registers that you use to process bytes, words, and double-words.
31 High byte
24
23 Low byte
16
15 High byte
8 7 Low byte
High word Figure 6-5 Areas of an Accumulator
Accumulator (1 or 2)
Low word
Status Word
The status word contains bits that you can reference in the address of bit logic instructions. The sections that follow the figure explain the significance of bits 0 through 8.
215... ...29 28
BR
27
26
25
OV
24
OS
23
OR
22
STA
21
20
CC 1 CC 0
RLO FC
Figure 6-6
Structure of the Status Word
Changing of the Bits in the Status Word
Value 0 1 x Sets the signal state to 0 Sets the signal state to 1 Changes the state State remains unchanged
Meaning
6-12
First Check
Bit 0 of the status word is called the first-check bit (FC bit, see Figure 6-6). At the start of a ladder logic network, the signal state of the FC bit is always 0, unless the previous network ended with (SAVE). (The bar over the FC indicates that it is negated, that is, always 0 at the beginning of a ladder logic network.) Each logic instruction checks the signal state of the FC bit as well as the signal state of the contact that the instruction addresses. The signal state of the FC bit determines the sequence of a logic string. If the FC bit is 0 (at the start of a ladder logic network), the instruction stores the result in the result of logic operation bit of the status word and sets the FC bit to 1. The checking process is called a first check. The 1 or 0 that is stored in the RLO bit after the first check is then referred to as the result of first check. If the signal state of the FC bit is 1, an operation then links the result of its signal state check with the RLO formed at the addressed contact since the first check, and stores the result in the RLO bit. A rung of ladder logic instructions (logic string) always ends with an output instruction (Set Coil, Reset Coil, or Output Coil) or a jump instruction related to the result of logic operation. Such an output instruction resets the FC bit to 0.
Result of Logic Operation
Bit 1 of the status word is called the result of logic operation bit (RLO bit, see Figure 6-6). This bit stores the result of a string of bit logic instructions or math comparisons. The signal state changes of the RLO bit can provide information related to power flow. For example, the first instruction in a network of ladder logic checks the signal state of a contact and produces a result of 1 or 0. The instruction stores the result of this signal state check in the RLO bit. The second instruction in a rung of bit logic instructions also checks the signal state of a contact and produces a result. Then the instruction combines this result with the value stored in the RLO bit of the status word according to the principles of Boolean logic (see First Check above and Chapter 8). The result of this logic operation is stored in the RLO bit of the status word, replacing the former value in the RLO bit. Each subsequent instruction in the rung performs a logic operation on two values: the result produced when the instruction checks the contact, and the current RLO. You can, for example, use a Boolean bit logic instruction on a first check to assign the state of the contents of a Boolean bit memory location to the RLO or trigger a jump.
6-13
Status Bit
Bit 2 of the status word is called the status bit (STA bit, see Figure 6-6). The status bit stores the value of a bit that is referenced. The status of a bit instruction that has read access to the memory (Normally Open Contact, Normally Closed Contact) is always the same as the value of the bit that this instruction checks (the bit on which it performs its logic operation). The status of a bit instruction that has write access to the memory (Set Coil, Reset Coil, or Output Coil) is the same as the value of the bit to which the instruction writes or, if no writing takes place, the same as the value of the bit that the instruction references. The status bit has no significance for bit instructions that do not access the memory. Such instructions set the status bit to 1 (STA=1). The status bit is not checked by an instruction. It is interpreted during program test (program status) only.
OR Bit
Bit 3 of the status word is called the OR bit (see Figure 6-6). The OR bit is needed if you use Contact instructions to perform logical Or operations with an And function. Logical Or operations correspond to arranging contacts in parallel. The And function corresponds to arranging contacts in series (see Section 6.2). An And function may contain the following instructions: Normally Open Contact and Normally Closed Contact. The OR bit shows these instructions that a previously executed And function has supplied the value 1 and thus forestalls the result of the logical Or operation. Any other bit-processing command resets the OR bit.
Overflow Bit
Bit 5 of the status word is called the overflow bit (OV bit, see Figure 6-6). The OV bit indicates a fault. It is set by a math instruction or a floating-point compare instruction after a fault occurs (overflow, illegal operation, illegal number). The bit is set or reset in accordance with the result of the math or comparison operation (fault).
Stored Overflow Bit
Bit 4 of the status word is called the stored overflow bit (OS bit, see Figure 6-6). The OS bit is set together with the OV bit if an error occurs. Because the OS bit remains set after the error has been eliminated (unlike the OV bit), it indicates whether or not a error occurred in one of the previously executed instructions. The following commands reset the OS bit: JOS (jump after stored overflow, STL programming), the block call commands, and the block end commands.
Condition Code 1 and Condition Code 0
Bits 7 and 6 of the status word are called condition code 1 and condition code 0 (CC 1 and CC 0, see Figure 6-6). CC 1 and CC 0 provide information on the following results or bits:
S Result of a math operation S Result of a comparison S Result of a digital operation S Bits that have been shifted out by a shift or rotate command
6-14
Tables 6-10 through 6-15 list the significance of CC 1 and CC 0 after your program executes certain instructions.
Table 6-10 CC 1 0 0 1 CC 1 and CC 0 after Math Instructions, without Overflow CC 0 0 1 0 Explanation Result = 0 Result < 0 Result > 0
Table 6-11 CC 1 0
CC 1 and CC 0 after Integer Math Instructions, with Overflow CC 0 0 Explanation Negative range overflow in Add Integer and Add Double Integer Negative range overflow in Multiply Integer and Multiply Double Integer Positive range overflow in Add Integer, Subtract Integer, Add Double Integer, Subtract Double Integer, Twos Complement Integer, and Twos Complement Double Integer Positive range overflow in Multiply Integer and Multiply Double Integer, Divide Integer, and Divide Double Integer Negative range overflow in Add Integer, Subtract Integer, Add Double Integer, and Subtract Double Integer Division by 0 in Divide Integer, Divide Double Integer, and Return Fraction Double Integer
Table 6-12 CC 1 0 0 1 1
CC 1 and CC 0 after Floating-Point Math Instructions, with Overflow CC 0 0 1 0 1 Gradual underflow Negative range overflow Positive range overflow Illegal operation Explanation
6-15
Table 6-13 CC 1 0 0 1 1
CC 1 and CC 0 after Comparison Instructions CC 0 0 1 0 1 IN2 = IN1 IN2 < IN1 IN2 > IN1 IN1 or IN2 is an illegal floating-point number Explanation
Table 6-14 CC 1 0 1
CC 1 and CC 0 after Shift and Rotate Instructions CC 0 0 0 Explanation Bit shifted out last = 0 Bit shifted out last = 1
Table 6-15 CC 1 0 1
CC 1 and CC 0 after Word Logic Instructions CC 0 0 0 Explanation Result = 0 Result <> 0
Binary Result Bit
Bit 8 of the status word is called the binary result bit (BR bit, see Figure 6-6). The BR bit forms a link between the processing of bits and words. This bit enables your program to interpret the result of a word operation as a binary result and to integrate this result in a binary logic chain. Viewed from this angle, the BR represents a machine-internal memory marker into which the RLO is saved prior to an RLO-changing word operation, so that it is still available for the continuation of the interrupted bit chain after the operation has been carried out. For example, the BR bit makes it possible for you to write a function block (FB) or a function (FC) in statement list (STL) and then call the FB or FC from ladder logic (LAD). When writing a function block or function that you want to call from Ladder, no matter whether you write the FB or FC in STL or LAD, you are responsible for managing the BR bit. The BR bit corresponds to the enable output (ENO) of a Ladder box. You should use the SAVE instruction (in STL) or the or the (SAVE) coil (in LAD) to store an RLO in the BR bit according to the following criteria:
S Store an RLO of 1 in the BR bit for a case where the FB or FC is

executed without error.

executed with error You should program these instructions at the end of the FB or FC so that these are the last instructions that are executed in the block.
6-16
Warning Possible unintentional resetting of the BR bit to 0. When writing FBs and FCs in Ladder, if you fail to manage the BR bit as described above, one FB or FC may overwrite the BR bit of another FB or FC. To avoid this problem, store the RLO at the end of each FB or FC as described above.
Meaning of EN/ENO
The enable input (EN) and enable output (ENO) parameters of a ladder logic box function according to the following principles:
S If EN is not activated (that is, if it has a signal state of 0), the box does
not carry out its function and ENO is not activated (that is, it also has a signal state of 0).
S If EN is activated (that is, if it has a signal state of 1) and the box to

which EN belongs executes its function without error, ENO is also activated (that is, it also has a signal state of 1).
S If EN is activated (that is, if it has a signal state of 1) and an error occurs

while the box to which EN belongs is executing its function, ENO is not activated (that is, its signal state is 0). When you call a system function block (SFB) or a system function (SFC) in your program, the SFB or SFC indicates whether the CPU was able to execute the function with or without errors by providing the following information in the binary result bit:
S If an error occurred during execution, the BR bit is 0. S If the function was executed with no error, the BR bit is 1.
6-17
6-18
Addressing
Chapter Overview
Section 7.1 7.2 Overview Types of Addresses Description
7
Page 7-2 7-4
7-1
Addressing
7.1
Overview
What Is Addressing?
Many ladder logic instructions work together with one or more addresses (operands). This address indicates a constant or a place where the instruction finds a variable on which to perform a logic operation. This place can be a bit, a byte, a word or a double word of the address. Possible addresses are, e.g.:
S A constant, the value of a timer or counter, or an ASCII character string S A bit in the status word of the programmable logic controller S A data block and a location within the data block area
Immediate and Direct Addressing The following types of addressing are available:
S Immediate addressing (enter a constant as the address) S Direct addressing (enter a variable as the address)
Figure 7-1 shows an example of immediate and direct addressing. The function of the box is to compare two input parameters (in this case, two 16-bit integers) to see if the first input is less than or equal to the second. The constant 50 is entered as input parameter IN1 Memory word MW200, a location in memory, is entered as input parameter IN2. Because the constant 50 in the example is the actual value with which IN1 of the box is to work, 50 is considered an immediate address of the instruction box. Because MW200 points to a location in memory where there is another value with which IN2 of the box is to work, MW200 is considered a direct address. MW200 is a location, not the actual value itself.
CMP_I <= IN1 IN2
50 MW200
Figure 7-1
Immediate and Direct Addressing
7-2
Addressing
Table 7-1 Type and Description BOOL (Bit) BYTE (Byte) WORD (Word)
Constant Formats for Immediate Addressing Using Addresses of Elementary Data Types Size in Format Options Bits 1 8 16 Boolean Text Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal Range and Number Notation (Lowest Value to Highest Value) TRUE/FALSE B#16#0 to B#16#FF 2#0 to 2#1111_1111_1111_1111 W#16#0 to W#16#FFFF Example TRUE B#16#10 byte#16#10 2#0001_0000_0000_0000 W#16#1000 word16#1000 C#998 B#(10,20) byte#(10,20) 2#1000_0001_0001_1000_ 1011_1011_0111_1111 DW#16#00A2_1234 dword#16#00A2_1234 B#(1,14,100,120) byte#(1,14,100,120) 1 L#1
BCD C#0 to C#999 Unsigned decimal B#(0,0) to B#(255,255) DWORD (Double word) 32 Binary 2#0 to 2#1111_1111_1111_1111_ 1111_1111_1111_1111 Hexadecimal DW#16#0000_0000 to Unsigned decimal DW#16#FFFF_FFFF B#(0,0,0,0) to B#(255,255,255,255) Signed decimal Signed decimal -32768 to 32767 L#-2147483648 to L#2147483647
INT (Integer) DINT (Double integer) REAL (Floating point) S5TIME (SIMATIC time) TIME (IEC time) DATE (IEC date) TIME_OF_ DAY (Time of day) CHAR (Character)
16 32
32
IEEE floating point S5 Time in 10-ms units (as default value) IEC time in 1-ms units, signed integer IEC date in 1-day units Time of day in 1-ms units
Upper limit: 3.402823e+38 Lower limit: 1.175495e-38 (see also Table C-5) S5T#0H_0M_0S_10MS to S5T#2H_46M_30S_0MS and S5T#0H_0M_0S_0MS T#-24D_20H_31M_23S_648MS to T#24D_20H_31M_23S_647MS D#1990-1-1 to D#2168-12-31 TOD#0:0:0.0 to TOD#23:59:59.999
1.234567e+13
16
S5T#0H_1M_0S_0MS S5TIME#0H_1M_0S_0MS T#0D_1H_1M_0S_0MS TIME#0D_1H_1M_0S_0MS D#1994-3-15 DATE#1994-3-15 TOD#1:10:3.3 TIME_OF_DAY#1:10:3.3
32
16 32
Character
A,B, and so on
7-3
Addressing
7.2
Types of Addresses
Possible Addresses
An address of a ladder logic instruction can indicate any of the following items:
S A bit whose signal state is to be checked S A bit to which the signal state of the logic string is assigned S A bit to which the result of logic operation (RLO) is assigned S A bit that is to be set or reset S A number that indicates a counter that is to be incremented or
decremented
S A number that indicates a timer to be used S An edge memory bit that stores the previous result of logic operation
(RLO)
S An edge memory bit that stores the previous signal state of another
address
S A byte, word, or double word that contains a value with which the ladder
element or box is to work.
S The number of a data block (DB or DI) that is to be opened or created S The number of a function (FC), system function (SFC), function block
(FB), or system function block (SFB) that is to be called
S A label that is to be jumped to

Address Identifiers Variables as addresses include an address identifier and a location within the memory area indicated by the address identifier. An address identifier can be one of the following two basic types:
S An address identifier that indicates both of the following:

The memory area in which an instruction finds a value (data object) on which to perform an operation (for example, I for the process-image input area of memory, see Table 6-5) The size of the value (data object) on which the instruction is to perform its operation (for example, B for byte, W for word, and D for double word, see Table 6-5)
S An address identifier that indicates a memory area but no size of a data

object in that area (for example, an identifier that indicates the area T for timer, C for counter, or DB or DI for data block, plus the number of that timer, counter, or data block, see Table 6-5.
7-4
Addressing
Pointers
A pointer is a device that identifies the location of a variable. A pointer contains an address instead of a value. When assigning an actual parameter for the parameter type pointer, you provide the memory address. STEP 7 allows you to enter the pointer in either a pointer format or simply as an address (such as M 50.0). The following is an example of the pointer format for accessing data starting at M 50.0: P#M50.0
Working with Word or Double Word as Data Object
If you are working with an instruction whose address identifier indicates a memory area of your programmable logic controller and a data object that is either a word or a double word in size, you need to be aware of the fact that the memory location is always referenced as a byte location. This byte location is the smallest byte number or the number of the high byte. For example, the address in the statement shown in Figure 7-2 references four successive bytes in memory area M, starting at byte 10 (MB10) and going through byte 13 (MB13).
Statement: L MD10 Address identifier Byte location
Figure 7-2
Example of Memory Location Referenced as Byte Location
Figure 7-3 illustrates data objects of the following sizes:
S Double word: memory double word MD10 S Word: memory words MW10, MW11, and MW12 S Byte: memory bytes MB10, MB11, MB12, and MB13
When you use absolute addresses that are a word or a double word in width, make sure that you do not create any byte assignments that overlap.
MW10 MB10 MB11 MW11 MD10 Figure 7-3 MB12
MW12 MB13
Referencing a Memory Location as a Byte Location
7-5
Addressing
7-6
Bit Logic Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 8.19 8.20 8.21 8.22 8.23 Overview Normally Open Contact Normally Closed Contact Output Coil Midline Output Invert Power Flow Save RLO to BR Memory Set Coil Reset Coil Set Counter Value Up Counter Coil Down Counter Coil Pulse Timer Coil Extended Pulse Timer Coil On-Delay Timer Coil Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Off-Delay Timer Coil Positive RLO Edge Detection Negative RLO Edge Detection Address Positive Edge Detection Address Negative Edge Detection Set Reset Flipflop Reset Set Flipflop Description
8
Page 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-15 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24
8-1
8.1
Overview
Explanation
Bit logic instructions work with two digits, 1 and 0. These two digits form the base of a number system called the binary system. The two digits 1 and 0 are called binary digits or bits. In the world of contacts and coils, a 1 indicates activated or energized, and a 0 indicates not activated or not energized. The bit logic instructions interpret signal states of 1 and 0 and combine them according to Boolean logic. These combinations produce a result of 1 or 0 that is called the result of logic operation (RLO, see Section 6.3). The logic operations that are triggered by the bit logic instructions perform a variety of functions.
Functions
There are bit logic instructions to perform the following functions:
S Normally Open Contact and Normally Closed Contact each check the
signal state of a contact and produce a result that is either copied to the result of logic operation (RLO) bit or is combined with the RLO. If these contacts are connected in series, they combine the result of their signal state check according to the And truth table (see Table 6-8); if they are connected in parallel, they combine their result according to the Or truth table (see Table 6-9).
S Output Coil and Midline Output assign the RLO or store it temporarily. S The following instructions react to an RLO of 1:
Set Coil and Reset Coil Set Reset and Reset Set Flipflops
S Other instructions react to a positive or negative edge transition to

perform the following functions: Increment or decrement the value of a counter Start a timer Produce an output of 1
S The remaining instructions affect the RLO directly in the following ways:
Negate (invert) the RLO Save the RLO to the binary result bit of the status word In this chapter, the counter and timer coils are shown in their international and SIMATIC forms.
8-2
8.2
Normally Open Contact
Description
You can use the Normally Open Contact (Address) instruction to check the signal state of a contact at a specified address. If the signal state at the specified address is 1, the contact is closed and the instruction produces a result of 1. If the signal state at the specified address is 0, the contact is open and the instruction produces a result of 0. When Normally Open Contact (Address) is the first instruction in a logic string, this instruction stores the result of its signal check in the result of logic operation (RLO) bit. Any Normally Open Contact (Address) instruction that is not the first instruction in a logic string combines the result of its signal state check with the value that is stored in the RLO bit. The instruction makes the combination in one of the two following ways:
S If the instruction is used in series, it combines the result of its signal state
check according to the And truth table.
S If the instruction is used in parallel, it combines the result of its signal

state check according to the Or truth table.
Table 8-1 Normally Open Contact (Address) Element and Parameter Parameter <address> Data Type BOOL TIMER COUNTER Memory Area I, Q, M, T, C, D, L Description The address indicates the bit whose signal state is checked.
LAD Element <address>
I 0.0
I 0.1
I 0.2
S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 S Or the signal state is 1 at input I 0.2
Power flows if one of the following conditions exists:
Status Word Bits Write BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR x STA x RLO x FC 1
Figure 8-1
Normally Open Contact (Address)
8-3
8.3
Normally Closed Contact
Description
You can use the Normally Closed Contact (Address) instruction to check the signal state of a contact at a specified address. If the signal state at the specified address is 0, the contact is closed and the instruction produces a result of 1. If the signal state at the specified address is 1, the contact is open and the instruction produces a result of 0. When Normally Closed Contact (Address) is the first instruction in a logic string, this instruction stores the result of its signal check in the result of logic operation (RLO) bit. Any Normally Closed Contact (Address) instruction that is not the first instruction in a logic string combines the result of its signal state check with the value that is stored in the RLO bit. The instruction makes the combination in one of the two following ways:
S If the instruction is used in series, it combines the result of its signal state
check according to the And truth table.
S If the instruction is used in parallel, it combines the result of its signal

state check according to the Or truth table.
Table 8-2 Normally Closed Contact (Address) Element and Parameter Parameter <address> Data Type BOOL TIMER COUNTER Memory Area I, Q, M, T, C, D, L Description The address indicates the bit whose signal state is checked.
I 0.0
I 0.1 Power flows if one of the following conditions exists: S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 S Or the signal state is 0 at input I 0.2
I 0.2
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR x STA x RLO x FC 1
Write
Figure 8-2
Normally Closed Contact (Address)
8-4
8.4
Output Coil
The Output Coil instruction works like a coil in a relay logic diagram. The coil at the end of the circuit is either energized or not energized depending on the following criteria:
Description
S If power can flow across the circuit to reach the coil (that is, the signal
state of the circuit is 1), the power energizes the coil.
S If power cannot flow across the entire circuit to reach the coil (that is, the
signal state of the circuit is 0), the power cannot energize the coil. The ladder logic string represents the circuit. The Output Coil instruction assigns the signal state of the ladder logic string to the coil that the instruction addresses (this is the same as assigning the signal state of the RLO bit to the address). If there is power flow across the logic string, the signal state of the logic string is 1; otherwise the signal state is 0. The Output Coil instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5. You can place an Output Coil only at the right end of a logic string. Multiple Output Coils are possible. You cannot place an output coil alone in an otherwise empty network. The coil must have a preceding link. You can create a negated output by using the Invert Power Flow instruction.
Table 8-3 Output Coil Element and Parameter Parameter <address> Data Type BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description The address indicates the bit to which the signal state of the logic string is assigned.
I 0.0
I 0.1
Q 4.0
I 0.2
I 0.3
Q 4.1
The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if one of the following conditions exists: S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 and I 0.3. S Or the signal state is 0 at input I 0.2 The signal state of output Q4.1 is 1 if one of the following conditions exists: S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 and I 0.3. S Or the signal state is 0 at input I 0.2 and 1 at input I 0.3
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA x RLO FC 0
Write Figure 8-3
Output Coil
8-5
8.5
Midline Output
Description
The Midline Output instruction is an intermediate assigning element that stores the RLO. This intermediate assigning element saves the bit logic combination of the last open branch until the assigning element is reached. In a series with other contacts, the Midline Output functions as a normal contact. The Midline Output instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of a Midline Output. For example, a Midline Output element can never be located at the end of a network or at the end of an open branch. See also Section 6.1. You can create a negated output by using the Invert Power Flow instruction.
Table 8-4
Midline Output Element and Parameter Parameter <address> Data Type BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L1 Description The address indicates the bit to which the RLO is assigned.
#
1
For the Midline Output instruction, you can only use an address in the L memory area if you declare it in VAR_TEMP. You cannot use the L memory area for an absolute address with this instruction.
I 1.0 I 1.1
M 0.0 #
I 1.2
I 1.3 NOT
M 1.1 # NOT
M 2.2 #
Q 4.0
The following Midline Outputs have the following RLOs: M 0.0 has the RLO of I 1.0 I 1.1
M 1.1 has the RLO of
I 1.0 I 1.1
M 0.0 #
I 1.2
I 1.3 NOT
M 2.2 has the RLO of the complete bit logic combination. Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA x RLO FC
Write Figure 8-4
Midline Output
8-6
8.6
Invert Power Flow
Description
Table 8-5
The Invert Power Flow instruction negates the RLO.

Invert Power Flow Element Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description
LAD Element NOT
I 0.0 NOT I 0.1 I 0.2
Q 4.0
Output Q 4.0 is 1 if one of the following conditions exists: S The signal state at input I 0.0 is NOT 1 S Or the signal state is NOT 1 at either input I 0.1 or input I 0.2 or both.
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR STA 1 RLO * FC
Write Figure 8-5
Invert Power Flow
8-7
8.7
Save RLO to BR Memory
Description
The Save RLO to BR Memory instruction saves the RLO to the BR bit of the status word.
Save RLO to BR Memory Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description
Table 8-6
LAD Element SAVE
I 0.0 SAVE
The status of the rung (= RLO) is saved to the BR bit before FC10 is called.
Status Word Bits BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR STA RLO FC
Write
Figure 8-6
Save RLO to BR Memory
8-8
8.8
Set Coil
Description
The Set Coil instruction is executed only if the RLO = 1. If the RLO = 1, this instruction sets its specified address to 1. If the RLO = 0, the instruction has no effect on the specified address. The address remains unchanged. The Set Coil instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5.
Table 8-7
Set Coil Element and Parameter Parameter <address> Data Type BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description The address indicates the bit that is to be set.
LAD Element <address> S
I 0.0
I 0.1
Q 4.0 S
The signal state of output Q 4.0 is set to 1 if one of the following conditions exists: S The signal state is 1 at input I 0.0 And I 0.1 S Or the signal state is 0 at input I 0.2. If the RLO of the branch is 0, the signal state of output Q 4.0 remains unchanged.
I 0.2
Write
Figure 8-7
Set Coil
8-9
8.9
Reset Coil
Description
The Reset Coil instruction is executed only if the RLO = 1. If the RLO = 1, this instruction resets its specified address to 0. If the RLO = 0, the instruction has no effect on its specified address. The address remains unchanged. The Reset Coil instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5.
Table 8-8
Reset Coil Element and Parameter Parameter <address> Data Type BOOL TIMER COUNTER Memory Area I, Q, M, T, C, D, L Description The address indicates the bit that is to be reset.
LAD Element <address> R
I 0.0
I 0.1
Q 4.0 R
The signal state of output Q 4.0 is reset to 0 if one of the following conditions exists: S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 S Or the signal state is 0 at input I 0.2 If the RLO of the branch is 0, the signal state of output Q 4.0 remains unchanged.
I 0.2
Status Word Bits
Write
BR
CC 1
CC 0
OV
OS
OR 0
STA x
RLO
FC 0
Figure 8-8
Reset Coil
8-10
8.10 Set Counter Value
Description
You can use the Set Counter Value (SC) instruction to place a preset value into the counter that you specify. The instruction is executed only if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO).
Set Counter Value Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Counter number Preset value Data Type COUNTER Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L Description The address indicates the number of the counter that is to be preset with a value. The value for presetting can be in the range of 0 to 999. C# should precede the value to indicate binary coded decimal (BCD) format, for example C#100.
Table 8-9
LAD Element <address> SZ SC <Preset value>
I 0.0 SC
C5 C#100
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, if there is a positive edge in the RLO), counter C 5 is preset with the value of 100. The C# indicates that you are entering a value in BCD format. When you save the rung, this value will be represented as w#16#100 on your screen. If there is not a positive edge, the value of counter C 5 remains unchanged.
Write
Figure 8-9
Set Counter Value
8-11
8.11 Up Counter Coil
Description
The Up Counter Coil (CU) instruction increments the value of a specified counter by one if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO) and the value of the counter is less than 999. If the RLO does not have a positive edge, or if the counter is already at 999, the value of the counter does not change. The Set Counter Value instruction sets the value of the counter (see Section 8.10).
Table 8-10
Up Counter Coil Element and Parameter, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Counter number Data Type COUNTER Memory Area C Description The address indicates the number of the counter that is to be incremented.
LAD Element <address> ZV CU
I 0.0 CU
C 10
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, if there is a positive edge in the RLO), the value of counter C 10 is incremented by 1 (unless the value of C 10 is equal to 999). If there is not a positive edge, the value of C 10 remains unchanged.
Status Word Bits
Write
BR
CC 1
CC 0
OV
OS
OR 0
STA
RLO
FC 0
Figure 8-10
Up Counter Coil
8-12
8.12 Down Counter Coil
Description
The Down Counter Coil (CD) instruction decrements the value of a specified counter by one if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO) and the value of the counter is more than 0. If the RLO does not have a positive edge, or if the counter is already at 0, the value of the counter does not change. The Set Counter Value instruction sets the value of the counter (see Section 8.10).
Table 8-11
Down Counter Coil Element and Parameter, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Counter number Data Type COUNTER Memory Area C Description The address indicates the number of the counter that is to be decremented.
LAD Element <address> ZR CD
I 0.0
C 10 CD
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, if there is a positive edge in the RLO), the value of counter C 10 is decremented by 1 (unless the value of C 10 is equal to 0). If there is not a positive edge, the value of C 10 remains unchanged.
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA RLO FC 0
Write
Figure 8-11
Down Counter Coil
8-13
8.13 Pulse Timer Coil
Description
The Pulse Timer Coil (SP) instruction starts a specified timer with a given time value if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO). The timer continues to run with the specified time as long as the RLO is positive. A signal state check of the timer number for 1 produces a result of 1 as long as the timer is running. If the RLO changes from 1 to 0 before the specified time has elapsed, the timer is stopped. In this case, a signal state check for 1 produces a result of 0. Time units are d (days), h (hours), m (minutes), s (seconds), and ms (milliseconds). For information on the location of a timer in memory and the components of a timer, see Section 9.1.
Table 8-12
Pulse Timer Coil Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Timer number Time value Data Type TIMER Memory Area T Description The address indicates the number of the timer that is to be started. Time value (S5TIME format)
LAD Element <address> SI SP <Time value>
S5TIME
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.0
T5 SP S5T# 2s
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. The timer continues to run with the specified time of 2 seconds as long as the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 1 to 0 before the specified time has elapsed, the timer stops. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 as long as the timer is running. Examples of timer values: S5T#2s = 2 seconds S5T#12m_18s = 12 minutes and 18 seconds
T5
Q 4.0
Write
Figure 8-12
Pulse Timer Coil
8-14
8.14 Extended Pulse Timer Coil
Description
The Extended Pulse Timer Coil (SE) instruction starts a specified timer with a given time value if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO). The timer continues to run with the specified time even if the RLO changes to 0 before the time has elapsed. A signal state check of the timer number for 1 produces a result of 1 as long as the timer is running. The timer is restarted (retriggered) with the specified time if the RLO changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running. For information on the location of a timer in memory and the components of a timer, see Section 9.1.
Extended Pulse Timer Coil Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Timer number Time value Data Type TIMER Memory Area T Description The address indicates the number of the timer that is to be started. Time value (S5TIME format)
Table 8-13
LAD Element <address> SV SE Time value
S5TIME
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.0 SE
T5 S5T#2s
If the signal state of I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. The timer continues to run without regard to a negative edge in the RLO. If the signal state of I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 before the specified time has elapsed, the timer is retriggered. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 as long as the timer is running.
T5
Q 4.0
Write
Figure 8-13
Extended Pulse Timer Coil
8-15
8.15 On-Delay Timer Coil
Description
The On-Delay Timer Coil (SD) instruction starts a specified timer if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO). A signal state check of the timer for 1 produces a result of 1 when the specified time has elapsed without error and the RLO is still 1. When the RLO changes from 1 to 0 while the timer is running, the timer is stopped. In this case, a signal state check for 1 always produces the result 0. For information on the location of a timer in memory and the components of a timer, see Section 9.1.
On-Delay Timer Coil Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Timer number Time value Data Type TIMER Memory Area T Description The address indicates the number of the timer that is to be started. Time value (S5TIME format)
Table 8-14
LAD Element <address> SE SD Time value
S5TIME
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.0
T5 SD S5T# 2s
T5
Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. If the time elapses and the signal state of input I 0.0 is still 1, output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from1 to 0, the timer is stopped, and output Q 4.0 is 0.
Write
Figure 8-14
On-Delay Timer Coil
8-16
8.16 Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil
Description
The Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil (SS) instruction starts a specified timer if the RLO has a positive edge (that is, a transition from 0 to 1 takes place in the RLO). The timer continues to run with the specified time even if the RLO changes to 0 before the time elapses. A signal state check of the timer number for 1 produces a result of 1 when the time has elapsed, without regard to the RLO. The timer is restarted (retriggered) with the specified time if the RLO changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running. For information on the location of a timer in memory and the components of a timer, see Section 9.1.
Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Timer number Time value Data Type TIMER Memory Area T Description The address indicates the number of the timer that is to be started. Time value (S5TIME format)
Table 8-15
LAD Element <address> SS Time value
S5TIME
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.0 SF
T5 S5T# 2s If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 1 to 0, the timer is started. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 when the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, or when the timer is running.
T5
Q 4.0
Write
Figure 8-15
Off-Delay Timer Coil
8-17
8.17 Off-Delay Timer Coil
Description
The Off-Delay Timer Coil (SF) instruction starts a specified timer if the RLO has a negative edge (that is, a transition from 1 to 0 takes place in the RLO). The result of a signal state check of the timer number for 1 is 1 when the RLO is 1, or when the timer is running. The timer is reset when the RLO goes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running. The timer is not restarted until the RLO changes from 1 to 0.
Parameters
For information on the location of a timer in memory and the components of a timer, see Section 9.1.
Off-Delay Timer Coil Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC and International Short Name Parameter Timer number Time value Data Type TIMER Memory Area T Description The address indicates the number of the timer that is to be started. Time value (S5TIME format)
Table 8-16
LAD Element <address> SA SF Time value
S5TIME
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.0 SF
T5 S5T# 2s
T5
Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 1 to 0, the timer is started. If the signal state of I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1, the timer is reset. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 when the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, or when the timer is running.
Write
Figure 8-16
Off-Delay Timer Coil
8-18
8.18 Positive RLO Edge Detection
Description
The operation Positive RLO Edge Detection recognizes a change in the entered address from 0 to 1 (rising edge) and displays this as RLO = 1 after the operation. The current signal state in the RLO is compared with the signal state of the address, the edge memory bit. If the signal state of the address is 0 and the RLO was 1 before the operation, the RLO will be 1 (impulse) after the operation, and 0 in all other cases. The RLO prior to the operation is stored in the address. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Positive RLO Edge Detection element (see Section 6.1).
Table 8-17
Positive RLO Edge Detection Element and Parameter Parameter <address1> Data Type BOOL Memory Area Q, M, D Description The address indicates the edge memory bit that stores the previous RLO.
LAD Element <address1> P
I 0.0
I 0.1
M 0.0 P
CAS1 JMP
I 0.2
Edge memory bit M 0.0 saves the old state of the RLO from the complete bit logic combination. If there is a signal change at the RLO from 0 to 1, the program jumps to label CAS1.
Write
Figure 8-17
Positive RLO Edge Detection
8-19
8.19 Negative RLO Edge Detection
Description
The operation Negative RLO Edge Detection recognizes a change in the entered address from 1 to 0 (falling edge) and displays this as RLO = 1 after the operation. The current signal state in the RLO is compared with the signal state of the address, the edge memory bit. If the signal state of the address is 1 and the RLO was 0 before the operation, the RLO will be 0 (impulse) after the operation, and 1 in all other cases. The RLO prior to the operation is stored in the address. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Negative RLO Edge Detection element (see Section 6.1).
Table 8-18
Negative RLO Edge Detection Element and Parameter Parameter <address1> Data Type BOOL Memory Area Q, M, D Description The address indicates the edge memory bit that stores the previous RLO.
LAD Element <address1> N
I 0.0
I 0.1
M 0.0 N
CAS1 JMP Edge memory bit M 0.0 saves the old state of the RLO from the complete bit logic combination. If there is a signal change at the RLO from 1 to 0, the program jumps to label CAS1.
I 0.2
Write
Figure 8-18
Negative RLO Edge Detection
8-20
8.20 Address Positive Edge Detection
Description
The Address Positive Edge Detection instruction compares the signal state of <address1> with the signal state from the previous signal state check stored in <address2>. If there is a change from 0 to 1, output Q is 1. Otherwise, it is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Address Positive Edge Detection box (see Section 6.1).
Table 8-19
Address Positive Edge Detection Box and Parameters Parameter <address1> dd 1 <address1> POS Q M_BIT BOOL Q, M, D Data Type BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description Signal to be checked for a positive edge transition. The address M_BIT indicates the edge memory bit that stores the previous signal state of POS. Use the process-image input (I) memory area for the M_BIT only if no input module already occupies this address. One-shot output
LAD Element
<address2>
M_BIT
BOOL
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.3
I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.2 POS Q M 0.0 M_BIT
I 0.4
Q 4.0
Output Q 4.0 is 1 if the following conditions exist: S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 And I 0.1 And I 0.2 S And there is a positive edge at input I 0.3 S And the signal state is 1 at input I 0.4
Status Word Bits BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC 1
Write
Figure 8-19
Address Positive Edge Detection
8-21
8.21 Address Negative Edge Detection
Description
The Address Negative Edge Detection instruction compares the signal state of <address1> with the signal state from the previous signal state check stored in <address2>. If there is a change from 1 to 0, output Q is 1. Otherwise it is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Address Negative Edge Detection box (see Section 6.1).
Table 8-20
Address Negative Edge Detection Box and Parameters Parameter <address1> <address1> NEG Q M_BIT BOOL Q, M, D Data Type BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description Signal to be checked for a negative edge transition The address M_BIT indicates the edge memory bit that stores the previous signal state of NEG. Use the process-image input (I) memory area for the M_BIT only if no input module already occupies this address. One-shot output
LAD Box
<address2>
M_BIT
BOOL
I, Q, M, D, L
I 0.3
I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.2 NEG M_BIT Q
I 0.4
Q 4.0
M 0.0
Output Q 4.0 is 1 if the following conditions exist: S The signal state is 1 at inputs I 0.0 And I 0.1 And I 0.2 S And there is a negative edge at input I 0.3 S And the signal state is 1 at input I 0.4
Status Word Bits BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC 1
Write
Figure 8-20
Address Negative Edge Detection
8-22
8.22 Set Reset Flipflop
Description
The Set Reset Flipflop instruction executes Set (S) and Reset (R) operations only when the RLO is 1. An RLO of 0 has no effect on these operations; the address specified in the operation remains unchanged. A Set Reset Flipflop is set if the signal state is 1 at the S input and 0 at the R input. Otherwise, if the signal state is 0 at the S input and 1 at the R input, the Flipflop is reset. If the RLO is 1 at both inputs, the Flipflop is reset. The Set Reset Flipflop instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Set Reset Flipflop box (see Section 6.1).
Table 8-21
Set Reset Flipflop Box and Parameters Parameter <address> S R Data Type BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description The address indicates the bit that is to be set or reset. Enabled set operation Enabled reset operation Signal state of <address>
LAD Box <address> SR S Q R
I 0.0 S I 0.1 R
M 0.0 SR Q
Q 4.0
If the signal state is 1 at input I 0.0 and 0 at input I 0.1, memory bit M 0.0 is set and output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state is 0 at input I 0.0 and 1 at input I 0.1, memory bit M 0.0 is reset and Q 4.0 is 0. If both signal states are 0, nothing is changed. If both signal states are 1, the Reset operation dominates because of the order, M 0.0 is reset, and Q 4.0 is 0.
Figure 8-21
Set Reset Flipflop
8-23
8.23 Reset Set Flipflop
Description
The Reset Set Flipflop instruction executes Set (S) and Reset (R) operations only when the RLO is 1. An RLO of 0 has no effect on these operations; the address specified in the operation remains unchanged. A Reset Set Flipflop is reset if the signal state is 1 at the R input and 0 on the S input. Otherwise, if the signal state is 0 at the R input and 1 at the S input, the Flipflop is set. If the RLO is 1 at both inputs, the Flipflop is set. The Reset Set Flipflop instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Reset Set Flipflop box (see Section 6.1).
Table 8-22
Reset Set Flipflop Box and Parameters Parameter <address> R S Q Data Type BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description The address indicates the bit that is to be set or reset. Enabled reset operation Enabled set operation Signal state of <address>
LAD Box <address> RS R Q S
I 0.0 R I 0.1 S
M 0.0 RS Q
Q 4.0
If the signal state is 1 at input I 0.0 and 0 at input I 0.1, memory bit M 0.0 is reset, and output Q 4.0 is 0. Otherwise, if the signal state is 0 at input I 0.0 and 1 at input I 0.1, memory bit M 0.0 is set and Q 4.0 is 1. If both signal states are 0, nothing is changed. If both signal states are 1, the Set operation dominates because of the order, M 0.0 is set, and Q 4.0 is 1.
Figure 8-22
Reset Set Flipflop
8-24
Timer Instructions
Chapter Overview
Section 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 Description Location of a Timer in Memory and Components of a Timer Choosing the Right Timer Pulse S5 Timer Extended Pulse S5 Timer On-Delay S5 Timer Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Off-Delay S5 Timer
9
Page 9-2 9-4 9-5 9-7 9-9 9-11 9-13
9-1
Timer Instructions
9.1
Location of a Timer in Memory and Components of a Timer
Area in Memory
Timers have an area reserved for them in the memory of your CPU. This memory area reserves one 16-bit word for each timer address. The ladder logic instruction set supports 256 timers. Please refer to your CPUs technical information to establish the number of timer words available. The following functions have access to the timer memory area: S Timer instructions S Updating of timer words by means of clock timing. This function of your CPU in the RUN mode decrements a given time value by one unit at the interval designated by the time base until the time value is equal to zero.
Time Value
Bits 0 through 9 of the timer word contain the time value in binary code. The time value specifies a number of units. Time updating decrements the time value by one unit at an interval designated by the time base. Decrementing continues until the time value is equal to zero. You can load a time value into the low word of accumulator 1 in binary, hexadecimal, or binary coded decimal (BCD) format (see Figure 9-1). The time range is from 0 to 9,990 seconds. You can pre-load a time value using either of the following formats:
S W#16#wxyz
Where w = the time base (that is, the time interval or resolution) Where xyz = the time value in binary coded decimal format
S S5T# aH_bbM_ccS_ddMS
Where a = hours, bb = minutes, cc = seconds, and dd = milliseconds The time base is selected automatically, and the value is rounded to the next lower number with that time base. The maximum time value that you can enter is 9,990 seconds, or 2H_46M_30S.
Time Base
Bits 12 and 13 of the timer word contain the time base in binary code. The time base defines the interval at which the time value is decremented by one unit (see Table 9-1 and Figure 9-1). The smallest time base is 10 ms; the largest is 10 s.
Table 9-1 Time Base and Its Binary Code Time Base 10 ms 100 ms 1 s 10 s Binary Code for the Time Base 00 01 10 11
9-2
Timer Instructions
Because time values are stored with only one time interval, values that are not exact multiples of a time interval are truncated. Values whose resolution is too high for the required range are rounded down to achieve the desired range but not the desired resolution. Table 9-2 shows the possible resolutions and their corresponding ranges.
Table 9-2 Time Base Resolutions and Ranges Resolution 0.01 second 0.1 second 1 second 10 seconds Range 10MS to 9S_990MS 100MS to 1M_39S_900MS 1S to 16M_39S 10S to 2HR_46M_30S
Bit Configuration in the Timer Cell
When a timer is started, the contents of the timer cell are used as the time value. Bits 0 through 11 of the timer cell hold the time value in binary coded decimal format (BCD format: each set of four bits contains the binary code for one decimal value). Bits 12 and 13 hold the time base in binary code (see Table 9-1). Figure 9-1 shows the contents of the timer cell loaded with timer value 127 and a time base of 1 second.
15... x x 1 0 0 0 1 Time base 1 second 0
...8 1
7... 0 0 2 1 0 0 1 7 1
...0 1
Time value in BCD (0 to 999)
Irrelevant: These bits are ignored when the timer is started. Figure 9-1 Contents of the Timer Cell for Timer Value 127, Time Base 1 Second
Reading the Time and the Time Base
Each timer box provides two outputs, BI and BCD, for which you can indicate a word location. The BI output provides the time value in binary format. The BCD output provides the time base and the time value in binary coded decimal (BCD) format.
9-3
Timer Instructions
9.2
Choosing the Right Timer

Figure 9-2 provides an overview of the five types of timers described in this chapter. This overview is intended to help you choose the right timer for your timing job.
Input signal
I 0.0
Output signal (Pulse timer)
Q 4.0 S_PULSE t The maximum time that the output signal remains at 1 is the same as the programmed time value t. The output signal stays at 1 for a shorter period if the input signal changes to 0.
Output signal (Extended pulse timer)
Q 4.0 S_PEXT t The output signal remains at 1 for the programmed length of time, regardless of how long the input signal stays at 1.
Output signal (On-delay timer)
Q 4.0 S_ODT t The output signal changes to 1 only when the programmed time has elapsed and the input signal is still 1.
Output signal (Retentive on-delay timer)
Q 4.0 S_ODTS t The output signal changes from 0 to 1 only when the programmed time has elapsed, regardless of how long the input signal stays at 1. Q 4.0 S_OFFDT t The output signal changes to 1 when the input signal changes to 1 or while the timer is running. The time is started when the input signal changes from 1 to 0.
Output signal (Off-delay timer)
Figure 9-2
Choosing the Right Timer
9-4
Timer Instructions
9.3
Pulse S5 Timer
Description
The Pulse S5 Timer instruction starts a specified timer if there is a positive edge (that is, a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at the Start (S) input. A signal change is always necessary to start a timer. The timer continues to run with the specified time at the Time Value (TV) input until the programmed time elapses, as long as the signal state at input TV is 1. While the timer is running, a signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1. If there is a change from 1 to 0 at the S input before the time has elapsed, the timer is stopped. Then a signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 0. While the timer is running, a change from 0 to 1 at the Reset (R) input of the timer resets the timer. This change also resets the time and the time base to zero. A signal state of 1 at the R input of the timer has no effect if the timer is not running. The actual time value can be scanned at outputs BI and BCD. The time value at BI is in binary coded format; at BCD it is in binary coded decimal format.
Table 9-3
Pulse S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. S TV R Q BI BCD Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S PULSE S_PULSE S TV R Q BI BCD
Table 9-4
Pulse S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no. S TW R Q DUAL DEZ Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S IMPULS S_IMPULS S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
9-5
Timer Instructions
Example
Figure 9-3 shows the Pulse S5 Timer instruction, describes the status word bits, and shows the pulse timer characteristics. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of timer boxes (see Section 6.1).
T5 I 0.0 S5T# 2s I 0.1 S_PULSE Q S TV BI R BCD Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, if there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. The timer continues to run with the specified time of two seconds (2s) as long as input I 0.0 is 1. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from1 to 0 before the time elapses, the timer is stopped. If the signal state of input I 0.1 changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running, the timer is reset. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 as long as the timer is running. Examples for other preset Time Values: Available units: h (hours), m (minutes), s (seconds), ms (milliseconds) S5T#4s > 4 seconds S5T#1h_15m > 1 hour and 15 minutes S5T#2h_46m_30s>2 hours, 46 minutes, and 30 seconds
Write
Timing Diagram
RLO at S input RLO at R input Timer running Signal state check for 1 Signal state check for 0 t = programmed time
Figure 9-3
S5 Pulse Timer
9-6
Timer Instructions
9.4
Extended Pulse S5 Timer
Description
The Extended Pulse S5 Timer instruction starts a specified timer if there is a positive edge (that is, a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at the Start (S) input. A signal change is always necessary to start a timer. The timer continues to run with the specified time at the Time Value (TV) input, even if the signal state at the S input changes to 0 before the time has elapsed. A signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1 as long as the timer is running. The timer is restarted with the specified time if the signal state at input S changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running. A change from 0 to 1 at the Reset (R) input of the timer while the timer is running resets the timer. This change also resets the time and the time base to zero. The actual time value can be scanned at the outputs BI and BCD. The time value at BI is in binary coded format; at BCD it is in binary coded decimal format.
Table 9-5
Extended Pulse S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. S TV R Q BI BCD Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S_PEXT S TV R Q BI BCD
Table 9-6
Extended Pulse S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no. S TW R Q DUAL DEZ Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S_VIMP S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
9-7
Timer Instructions
Example
Figure 9-4 shows the Extended Pulse S5 Timer instruction, describes the status word bits, and shows the pulse timer characteristics. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of timer boxes (see Section 6.1).
T5 I 0.0 S5T# 2s I 0.1 S_PEXT S TV R Q BI BCD Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. The timer continues to run with the specified time of two seconds (2s) without regard to a negative edge at input S. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 before the time has elapsed, the timer is restarted. If the signal state of input I 0.1 changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running, the timer is reset. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 as long as the timer is running (see also Section 9.3).
Write
Timing Diagram
t t t
Figure 9-4
Extended Pulse S5 Timer
9-8
Timer Instructions
9.5
On-Delay S5 Timer
Description
The On-Delay S5 Timer instruction starts a specified timer if there is a positive edge (that is, a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at the Start (S) input. A signal change is always necessary to start a timer. The timer continues to run with the specified time at the Time Value (TV) input as long as the signal state at input S is 1. A signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1 when the time has elapsed without error and when the signal state at input S is still 1. When the signal state at input S changes from 1 to 0 while the timer is running, the timer is stopped. In this case, a signal state check for 1 at output Q always produces the result 0. A change from 0 to 1 at the Reset (R) input of the timer while the timer is running resets the timer. This change also resets the time and the time base to zero. The timer is also reset if the signal state is 1 at the R input while the timer is not running. The actual time value can be scanned at the outputs BI and BCD. The time value at BI is in binary coded format; at BCD it is in binary coded decimal format. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of timer boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 9-7
On-Delay S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no.
T no.
LAD Box
Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T
Memory Area
Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
S_ODT _ S TV R Q BI BCD
S TV R Q BI BCD
I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L
Table 9-8
On-Delay S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no.
T no.
LAD Box
Memory Area
S_EVERZ _ S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
9-9
Timer Instructions
T5 I 0.0 S5T# 2s I 0.1 S_ODT S TV R Q BI BCD Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. If the specified time of two seconds (2s) elapses and the signal state of input I 0.0 is still 1, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 1 to 0, the timer is stopped and output Q 4.0 is 0 (see also Section 9.3). If the signal state of input I 0.1 changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running, the timer is reset.
Status Word Bits
Write
BR
CC 1
CC 0
OV
OS
OR x
STA x
RLO x
FC 1
Timing Diagram
t t
RLO at S input RLO at R input Timer running Signal state check for 1 Signal state check for 0 t = programmed time Figure 9-5 On-Delay S5 Timer
9-10
Timer Instructions
9.6
Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer
Description
The Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer instruction starts a specified timer if there is a positive edge (that is, a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at the Start (S) input. A signal change is always necessary to start a timer. The timer continues to run with the time that is specified at the Time Value (TV) input, even if the signal state at input S changes to 0 before the timer has expired. A signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1 when the time has elapsed, without regard to the signal state at input S when the reset input (R) remains at 0. The timer is restarted with the specified time if the signal state at input S changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running. A change from 0 to 1 at the Reset (R) input of the timer resets the timer without regard to the RLO at the S input.
Table 9-9
Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. S TV R Q BI BCD Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S_ODTS S TV R Q BI BCD
Table 9-10
Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no. S TW R Q DUAL DEZ Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S_SEVERZ S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
9-11
Timer Instructions
Example
Figure 9-6 shows the Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer instruction, describes the status word bits, and shows the pulse timer characteristics. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of timer boxes (see Section 6.1).
T5 I 0.0 S5T# 2s I 0.1 S_ODTS S TV R Q BI BCD Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge in the RLO), timer T 5 is started. The timer continues to run without regard to a signal change of input I 0.0 from1 to 0. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1 before the time has elapsed, the timer is restarted. If the signal state of input I 0.1 changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running, the timer is reset. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if the time has elapsed and I 0.1 remains on 0 (see also Section 9.3).
Status Word Bits
Write
BR
CC 1
CC 0
OV
OS
OR x
STA x
RLO x
FC 1
Timing Diagram
t t t
Figure 9-6
Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer
9-12
Timer Instructions
9.7
Off-Delay S5 Timer
Description
The Off-Delay S5 Timer instruction starts a specified timer if there is a negative edge (that is, a change in signal state from 1 to 0) at the Start (S) input. A signal change is always necessary to start a timer. The result of a signal state check for 1 at output Q is 1 when the signal state at the S input is 1 or when the timer is running. The timer is reset when the signal state at input S goes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running. The timer is not restarted until the signal state at input S changes again from 1 to 0. A change from 0 to 1 at the Reset (R) input of the timer while the timer is running resets the timer. The actual time value can be scanned at the outputs BI and BCD. The time value at BI is in binary coded format; at BCD it is in binary coded decimal format. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of timer boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 9-11
Off-Delay S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. Data Type TIMER BOOL S5TIME BOOL BOOL WORD WORD T I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L, T, C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Memory Area Description Timer identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Start input Preset time value (range 0 to 9999) Reset input Status of the timer Remaining time value (integer format) Remaining time value (BCD format)
LAD Box
T no.
S_OFFDT S TV R Q BI BCD
S TV R Q BI BCD
Table 9-12
Off-Delay S5 Timer Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no.
T no.
LAD Box
Memory Area
S_AVERZ S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
S TW R Q DUAL DEZ
9-13
Timer Instructions
Example
Figure 9-7 shows the Off-Delay S5 Timer instruction, describes the status word bits, and shows the pulse timer characteristics.
T5 I 0.0 S5T# 2s I 0.1 S_OFFDT S TV R Q BI BCD Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 1 to 0 (that is, there is a negative edge in the RLO), the timer is started. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 when the signal state of I 0.0 is 1 or the timer is running (see also Section 9.3). If the signal state of input I 0.1 changes from 0 to 1 while the timer is running, the timer is reset.
Status Word Bits
Write
BR
CC 1
CC 0
OV
OS
OR x
STA x
RLO x
FC 1
Timing Diagram
t t
Figure 9-7
Off-Delay S5 Timer
9-14
Counter Instructions
Chapter Overview
Section 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Description Location of a Counter in Memory and Components of a Counter Up-Down Counter Up Counter Down Counter
10
Page 10-2 10-3 10-5 10-7
10-1
10.1 Location of a Counter in Memory and Components of a Counter
Area in Memory
Counters have an area reserved for them in the memory of your CPU. This memory area reserves one 16-bit word for each counter address. The ladder logic instruction set supports 256 counters. The counter instructions are the only functions that have access to the counter memory area.
Count Value
Bits 0 through 9 of the counter word contain the count value in binary code. The count value is moved to the counter word when a counter is set. The range of the count value is 0 to 999. You can vary the count value within this range by using the Up-Down Counter, Up Counter, and Down Counter instructions.
Bit Configuration in the Counter
You provide a counter with a preset value by entering a number from 0 to 999, for example 127, in the following format: C#127 The C# stands for binary coded decimal format (BCD format: each set of four bits contains the binary code for one decimal value). Bits 0 through 11 of the counter contain the count value in binary coded decimal format . Figure 10-1 shows the contents of the counter after you have loaded the count value 127, and the contents of the counter cell after the counter has been set.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 1 0 8 1 7 0 6 0 2 5 1 4 0 3 0 2 1 7 1 1 0 1
Irrelevant
Count value in BCD (0 to 999) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1
irrelevant
Binary count value
Figure 10-1
Contents of the Counter Cell after the Counter has been set with Count Value 127
10-2
10.2 Up-Down Counter
Description
A positive edge (i.e. a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at input S of the Up-Down Counter instruction sets the counter with the value at the Preset Value (PV) input. A signal state of 1 at input R resets the counter. Resetting the counter places the value of the count at 0. The counter is incremented by 1 if the signal state at input CU changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge) and the value of the counter is less than 999. The counter is decremented by 1 if the signal state at input CD changes from 0 to 1 (that is, there is a positive edge) and the value of the counter is more than 0. If there is a positive edge at both count inputs, both operations are executed and the count remains the same. A signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1 when the count is greater than 0; the check produces a result of 0 when the count is equal to 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the counter boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 10-1
Up-Down Counter Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. CU Data Type COUNTER BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Counter identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Count up input CU Count down input CD Set input for presetting counter Value in the range of 0 to 999 for presetting counter (entered as C#<value> to indicate BCD format) Reset input Status of the counter Current counter value (integer format) Current counter value (BCD format)
LAD Box
C no no. S CUD S_CUD CU CD S PV R Q
CD S PV
CV CV_BCD R Q CV CV_BCD BOOL BOOL WORD WORD I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L
10-3
Table 10-2
Up-Down Counter Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no. ZV Z no. no ZR S ZW Data Type COUNTER BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Counter identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Count up input ZV Count down input ZR Set input for presetting counter Value in the range of 0 to 999 for presetting counter (entered as C#<value> to indicate BCD format) Reset input Status of the counter Current counter value (integer format) Current counter value (BCD format)
LAD Box
ZAEHLER ZV Q ZR S DUAL ZW R DEZ
R Q DUAL DEZ
BOOL BOOL WORD WORD
I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L
C 10 I 0.0 CU I 0.1 CD I 0.2 S C#55 I 0.3 R PV CV CV_BCD S_CUD Q Q 4.0 A change in signal state from 0 to 1 at input I 0.2 sets counter C 10 with the value 55 in binary coded decimal format. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1, the value of counter C 10 is increased by 1, except when the value of counter C 10 is equal to 999. If input I 0.1 changes from 0 to 1, counter C 10 is decreased by 1, except when the value of counter C 10 is equal to 0. If I 0.3 changes from 0 to 1, the value of C 10 is set to 0. Q 4.0 is 1, when C 10 is not equal to 0.
Write
Figure 10-2
Up-Down Counter
10-4
10.3 Up Counter
Description
A positive edge (i.e. a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at input S of the Up Counter instruction sets the counter with the value at the Preset Value (PV) input. With a positive edge, the counter is reset at input R. The resetting of the counter sets the count value to 0. With a positive edge, the value of the counter at input CU is increased by 1 when the count value is less than 999. A signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1 when the count is greater than 0; the check produces a result of 0 when the count is equal to 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the counter boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 10-3
Up Counter Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. Data Type COUNTER BOOL BOOL WORD BOOL BOOL WORD WORD Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Counter identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Count up input CU Set input for presetting counter Value in the range of 0 to 999 for presetting counter (entered as C#<value> to indicate BCD format) Reset input Status of the counter Current counter value (integer format) Current counter value (BCD format)
LAD Box
C no. S_CU CU S PV R Q
CU S PV CV
CV_BCD
R Q CV CV_BCD
10-5
Table 10-4
Up Counter Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no. Data Type COUNTER BOOL BOOL WORD BOOL BOOL WORD WORD Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Counter identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Count up input ZV Set input for presetting counter Value in the range of 0 to 999 for presetting counter (entered as C#<value> to indicate BCD format) Reset input Status of the counter Current counter value (integer format) Current counter value (BCD format)
LAD Box
Z no. Z_VORW ZV S ZW R Q
ZV S ZW
DUAL DEZ R Q DUAL DEZ
C 10 I 0.0 CU S_CU Q A change in signal state from 0 to 1 at input I 0.2 sets counter C 10 with the value 901 in binary coded decimal format. If the signal state of I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1, the value of counter C 10 is increased by 1, unless the value of C 10 is equal to 999. If I 0.3 changes from 0 to 1, the value of C 10 is set to 0. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if C 10 is not equal to 0. Q 4.0
I 0.2 S C#901 I 0.3 PV R CV CV_BCD
Write
Figure 10-3
Up Counter
10-6
10.4 Down Counter
Description
A positive edge (that is, a change in signal state from 0 to 1) at input S of the Down Counter instruction sets the counter with the value at the Preset Value (PV) input. With a positive edge, the counter is reset at input R. The resetting of the counter sets the count value to 0. With a positive edge, the value of the counter at the input is reduced by 1 when the count value is greater than 0. A signal state check for 1 at output Q produces a result of 1 when the count is greater than 0; the check produces a result of 0 when the count is equal to 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the counter boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 10-5
Down Counter Box and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter no. Data Type COUNTER BOOL BOOL WORD BOOL BOOL WORD WORD Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Counter identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Count down input CD Set input for presetting counter Value in the range of 0 to 999 for presetting counter (entered as C#<value> to indicate BCD format) Reset input Status of the counter Current counter value (integer format) Current counter value (BCD format)
LAD Box
C no. S_CD S CD CD S PV R Q
CD S PV
CV CV_BCD
R Q CV CV_BCD
10-7
Table 10-6
Down Counter Box and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter no. Data Type COUNTER BOOL BOOL WORD BOOL BOOL WORD WORD Memory Area C I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Counter identification number. The range depends on the CPU. Count down input ZR Set input for presetting counter Value in the range of 0 to 999 for presetting counter (entered as C#<value> to indicate BCD format) Reset input Status of the counter Current counter value (integer format) Current counter value (BCD format)
LAD Box
Z no. Z RUECK Z_RUECK ZR S ZW R Q
ZR S ZW
DUAL DEZ
R Q DUAL DEZ
C 10 I 0.0 CD S_CD Q A change in signal state from 0 to 1 at input I 0.2 sets counter C 10 with the value 89 in binary coded decimal format. If the signal state of input I 0.0 changes from 0 to 1, the value of counter C 10 is decreased by 1, unless the value of counter C 10 is equal to 0. The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if counter C 10 is not equal to 0. If I 0.3 changes from 0 to 1, the value of C 10 is set to 0. Q 4.0
I 0.2 S C#89 I 0.3 PV R CV CV_BCD
Write
Figure 10-4
Down Counter
10-8
Integer Math Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 Add Integer Add Double Integer Subtract Integer Subtract Double Integer Multiply Integer Multiply Double Integer Divide Integer Divide Double Integer Return Fraction Double Integer Description
11
Page 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 11-11
Evaluating the Bits of the Status Word After Integer Math Instructions
11-1
11.1 Add Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Add Integer instruction. This instruction adds inputs IN1 and IN2. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for an integer, the OV and OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-1
Add Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL INT INT INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output First value for addition Second value for addition Result of addition
LAD Box ADD_I ADD I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
ADD_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
Q 4.0 S NOT
MW0 MW2
MW10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the ADD_I box. The result of the addition MW0 + MW2 is put into memory word MW10. If the result is outside the permissible range for an integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): BR CC 1 CC 0 Write x x x
OV x
OS x
OR x
STA 1
RLO x
FC x
Figure 11-1
Add Integer
11-2
11.2 Add Double Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Add Double Integer instruction. This instruction adds inputs IN1 and IN2. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-2
Add Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for addition Second value for addition Result of addition Description
LAD Box ADD_DI ADD DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
ADD_DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MD0 MD4
MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the ADD_DI box. The result of the addition MD0 + MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR x CC 1 x CC 0 x OV x OS x OR x STA 1 RLO x FC x
Figure 11-2
Add Double Integer
11-3
11.3 Subtract Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Subtract Integer instruction. This instruction subtracts input IN2 from IN1. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for an integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-3
Subtract Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL INT INT INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value (from which to subtract) Value to subtract from first value Result of subtraction Description
LAD Box SUB_I SUB I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
SUB_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MW0 MW2
MW10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the SUB_I box. The result of the subtraction MW0 MW2 is put into memory word MW10. If the result is outside the permissible range for an integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
OV x
OS x
OR x
STA 1
RLO x
FC x
Figure 11-3
Subtract Integer
11-4
11.4 Subtract Double Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Subtract Double Integer instruction. This instruction subtracts input IN2 from IN1. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-4
Subtract Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value (from which to subtract) Value to subtract from first value Result of subtraction Description
LAD Box SUB_DI SUB DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
SUB_DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MD0 MD4
MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the SUB_DI box. The result of the subtraction MD0 MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Figure 11-4
Subtract Double Integer
11-5
11.5 Multiply Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Multiply Integer instruction. This instruction multiplies inputs IN1 and IN2. The result is a 32-bit integer that can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a 16-bit integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-5
Multiply Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL INT INT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for multiplication Second value for multiplication Result of multiplication Description
LAD Box MUL_I MUL I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
MUL_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MW0 MW2
MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the MUL_I box. The result of the multiplication MW0 x MW2 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a 16-bit integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Figure 11-5
Multiply Integer
11-6
11.6 Multiply Double Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Multiply Double Integer instruction. This instruction multiplies inputs IN1 and IN2. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-6
Multiply Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for multiplication Second value for multiplication Result of multiplication Description
LAD Box MUL_DI MUL DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
MUL_DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MD0 MD4
MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the MUL_DI box. The result of the multiplication MD0 x MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Figure 11-6
Multiply Double Integer
11-7
11.7 Divide Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Divide Integer instruction. This instruction divides input IN1 by IN2. The integer quotient (truncated result) can be scanned at OUT. The remainder cannot be scanned. If the quotient is outside the permissible range for an integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-7
Divide Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL INT INT INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Dividend Divisor Result of division Description
LAD Box DIV_I DIV I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0 MW0 MW2
DIV_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MW10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the DIV_I box. The quotient of dividing MW0 by MW2 is put into memory word MW10. If the quotient is outside the permissible range for an integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
OV x
OS x
OR x
STA 1
RLO x
FC x
Figure 11-7
Divide Integer
11-8
11.8 Divide Double Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Divide Double Integer instruction. This instruction divides input IN1 by IN2. The quotient (truncated result) can be scanned at OUT. The Divide Double Integer instruction stores the quotient as a single 32-bit value in DINT format. This instruction does not produce a remainder. If the quotient is outside the permissible range for a double integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-8
Divide Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Dividend Divisor Result of division Description
LAD Box DIV_DI DIV DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0 MD0 MD4
DIV_DI EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the DIV_DI box. The quotient of dividing MD0 by MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the quotient is outside the permissible range for a double integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Figure 11-8
Divide Double Integer
11-9
11.9 Return Fraction Double Integer
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Return Fraction Double Integer instruction. This instruction divides input IN1 by IN2. The remainder (fraction) can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer, the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and the ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of integer math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 11-9
Return Fraction Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Dividend Divisor Remainder Description
LAD Box MOD EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0 MD0 MD4
MOD EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the MOD box. The remainder (fraction) of dividing MD0 by MD4 is stored in memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a double integer or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Figure 11-9
Return Fraction Double Integer
11-10
11.10 Evaluating the Bits of the Status Word After Integer Math Instructions
The basic math instructions affect the following bits in the status word:
S CC 1 and CC 0 S OV S OS
A dash (-) in the table means that the bit is not affected by the result of the instruction.
Table 11-10 Signal State of the Status Word Bits: Result in Valid Range Status Word Bits CC 1 0 0 CC 0 0 1 OV 0 0 OS -
Valid Range g for the Result with Integers g (16 and 32 bits) 0 (zero) 16 bits: -32 768 v result t 0 (negative number) 32 bits: -2 147 483 648 v result t 0 (negative number) 16 bits: 32 767 w result u0 (positive number) 32 bits: 2 147 483 647 w result u0 (positive number)
Table 11-11
Signal State of the Status Word Bits: Result not in Valid Range Status Word Bits CC 1 1 0 CC 0 0 1 OV 1 1 OS 1 1
Invalid Range g for the Result with Integers g (16 and 32 bits) 16 bits: result u 32 bits: result u 32 767 (positive number) 2 147 483 647 (positive number)
16 bits: result t -32 768 (negative number) 32 bits: result t -2 147 483 648 (negative number)
Table 11-12
Signal State of the Status Word Bits: Integer Math Instructions (32 Bits) +D, /D and MOD Instruction Status Word Bits CC 1 0 1 CC 0 0 1 OV 1 1 OS 1 1
+D: result = -4 294 967 296 /D or MOD: division by 0
11-11
11-12
Floating-Point Math Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 Overview Add Floating-Point Numbers Subtract Floating-Point Numbers Multiply Floating-Point Numbers Divide Floating-Point Numbers Description
12
Page 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-11 12-12 12-13
Evaluating the Bits of the Status Word After Floating-Point Instructions Establishing the Absolute Value of a Floating-Point Number Establishing the Square and/or the Square Root of a Floating-Point Number Establishing the Natural Logarithm of a Floating-Point Number Establishing the Exponential Value of a Floating-Point Number Establishing the Trigonometrical Functions of Angles as Floating-Point Numbers
12-1
12.1 Overview
You can use the floating-point math instructions to perform the following math instructions using two 32-bit IEEE floating-point numbers:
S Add S Subtract S Multiply S Divide

The IEEE 32-bit floating-point numbers belong to the data type called REAL. For information on the format of floating-point (real) numbers, see Appendix C. Using floating-point math, you can carry out the following operations with one 32-bit IEEE floating-point number:
S Establish the square (SQR) and the square root (SQRT) of a floating-point
number
S Establish the natural logarithm (LN) of a floating-point number S Establish the exponential value (EXP) of a floating-point number to base
e (= 2.71828...)
S Establish the following trigonometrical functions of an angle represented

as a 32-bit IEEE floating-point number: Establish the sine of a floating-point number (SIN) and establish the arc sine of a floating-point number (ASIN) Establish the cosine of a floating-point number (COS) and establish the arc cosine of a floating-point number (ACOS) Establish the tangent of a floating-point number (TAN) and establish the arc tangent of a floating-point number (ATAN)
12-2
12.2 Add Floating-Point Numbers
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Add Floating-Point Numbers instruction. This instruction adds inputs IN1 and IN2. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a floating-point number (overflow or underflow), the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and ENO is 0. You will find information on evaluating the displays in the status word in Section 12.6. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of floating-point math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 12-1
Add Real Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for addition Second value for addition Result of addition Description
LAD Box ADD_R ADD R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
ADD_R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MD0 MD4
MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the ADD_R box. The result of the addition MD0 + MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a real number or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
OV x
OS x
OR x
STA 1
RLO x
FC x
Figure 12-1
Add Real
12-3
12.3 Subtract Floating-Point Numbers
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Subtract Floating-Point Numbers instruction. This instruction subtracts input IN2 from IN1. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a floating-point number (overflow or underflow), the OV and the OS bit of the status word is 1 and ENO is 0. You will find information on evaluating the displays in the status word in Section 12.6. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of floating-point math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 12-2
Subtract Real Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value (from which to subtract) Value to subtract from first value Result of subtraction Description
LAD Box SUB_R SUB R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
SUB_R EN ENO NOT
Q 4.0 S
MD0 MD4
IN1 IN2 OUT MD10 Status Word Bits
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the SUB_R box. The result of the subtraction MD0 MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a real number or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Function is executed (EN = 1): BR CC 1 CC 0 Write x x x
OV x
OS x
OR x
STA 1
RLO x
FC x
Figure 12-2
Subtract Real
12-4
12.4 Multiply Floating-Point Numbers
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Multiply Floating-Point Numbers instruction. This instruction multiplies inputs IN1 and IN2. The result can be scanned at OUT. If the result is outside the permissible range for a floating-point number (overflow or underflow), the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and ENO is 0. You will find information on evaluating the displays in the status word in Section 12.6. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of floating-point math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 12-3
Multiply Real Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for multiplication Second value for multiplication Result of multiplication Description
LAD Box MUL_R MUL R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
I 0.0
MUL_R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
NOT
Q 4.0 S
MD0 MD4
MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the MUL_R box. The result of the multiplication MD0 x MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a real number or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): BR CC 1 CC 0 Read * Write x x x
OV * x
OS x
OR * x
STA 1
RLO * x
FC * x
Figure 12-3
Multiply Real
12-5
12.5 Divide Floating-Point Numbers
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Divide Floating-Point Numbers instruction. This instruction divides input IN1 by IN2. The result can be scanned at O. If the result is outside the permissible range for a floating-point number (overflow or underflow), the OV and the OS bit of the status word are 1 and ENO is 0. You will find information on evaluating the displays in the status word in Section 12.6. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of floating-point math boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 12-4
Divide Real Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN1 O IN2 O Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Dividend Divisor Result of division Description
LAD Box DIV_R DIV R EN ENO IN1 IN2
I 0.0 MD0 MD4
DIV_R EN ENO IN1 IN2 O
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the DIV_R box. The result of dividing MD0 by MD4 is put into memory double word MD10. If the result is outside the permissible range for a real number or the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): BR CC 1 CC 0 Write x x x OV x OS x OR x STA 1 RLO x FC x
Figure 12-4
Divide Real
12-6
12.6 Evaluating the Bits of the Status Word After Floating-Point Instructions
Description
The math instructions affect the following bits in the status word:
S CC 1 and CC 0 S OV S OS
A hyphen () entered in a bit column of the table means that the bit in question is not affected by the result of the integer math instruction.
Table 12-5 Signal State of Status Word Bits for Floating-Point Math Result that is in Valid Range Bits of Status Word Valid Range for a Floating-Point Result (32 Bits) +0, -0 (zero) -3.402823E+38 t Result t -1.175494E-38 (negative number) +1.175494E38 t Result t 3.402823E+38 (positive number) CC 1 CC 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 OV 0 0 0 OS
Table 12-6
Signal State of Status Word Bits for Floating-Point Math Result that is not in Valid Range Bits of Status Word CC 1 CC 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 OV 1 1 1 1 1 OS 1 1 1 1 1
Range Result g Not Valid for a Floating-Point g (32 Bits) -1.175494E-38 t Result t -1.401298E-45 (negative number) Underflow +1.401298E-45 t Result t +1.175494E-38 (positive number) Underflow Result t -3.402823E+38 (negative number) Overflow Result u -3.402823E+38 (positive number) Overflow Result < -3.402823E+38 or Result > +3.402823E+38 no floating-point number
12-7
12.7 Establishing the Absolute Value of a Floating-Point Number
Description
With the Establishing the Absolute Value of a Floating-Point Number instruction you can establish the absolute value of a floating-point number.
Box ABS and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Input value: real Output value: absolute value of the real number
Table 12-7
LAD Box ABS EN ENO IN OUT
ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
ABS EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
If I 0.0 = 1, the absolute value of MD8 is output at MD12. MD8 = +6.234 x 103 results in MD12 = 6.234 x 103. Output Q 4.0 is 1 if the conversion is not executed (ENO = EN = 0).
MD8
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR X CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA X RLO X /FC 1
Figure 12-5Establishing the Absolute Value of a Floating-Point Number
12-8
12.8 Establishing the Square and/or the Square Root of a Floating-Point Number
Description
With the Establishing the Square of a Floating-Point Number instruction, you can square a floating-point number. With the instruction Establishing the Square Root of a Floating-Point Number, you can extract the square root of a floating-point number. This instruction produces a positive result when the address is greater than 0. Sole exception: the square root of -0 is -0. You can find information on the effects that the instructions SQR and SQRT have on the status bits CC 1, CC 0, OV and OS in Section 12.6.
Parameters
Table 12-8 shows the box SQR and describes the parameters. Table 12-9 shows the box SQRT and describes the parameters.
Table 12-8 Box SQR and Parameters Parameter EN SQR EN ENO IN OUT ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Square of the number
LAD Box
Table 12-9
Box SQRT and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Square root of the number
LAD Box
SQ SQRT EN ENO IN OUT
ENO IN OUT
12-9
I 0.0
SQRT EN ENO IN OUT
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
MD0
The box SQRT is activated when I 0.0 = 1. The result of SQRT (MD0) is stored in the memory double word MD10. If MD0 < 0 or if the result is outside of the permissible area for floating-point numbers or if the signal state of I 0.0 = 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR x CC 1 x CC 0 x OV x OS x OR 0 STA x RLO x FC 1
Figure 12-6
Establishing the Square Root of a Floating-Point Number
12-10
12.9 Establishing the Natural Logarithm of a Floating-Point Number
Description
With the Establishing the Natural Logarithm of a Floating-Point Number instruction you can determine the natural logarithm of a floating-point number. You can find information on the effects that the instruction LN has on the status bits CC 1, CC 0, OV and OS in Section 12.6.
Table 12-10 Box LN and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Natural logarithm of the number
LAD Box
LN EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
LN EN ENO IN OUT
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
MD0
The box LN is activated when I 0.0 = 1. The result of LN (MD0) is stored in the memory double word MD10. If MD0 < 0 or if the result is outside of the permissible area for floating-point numbers or if the signal state of I 0.0 = 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
OV x
OS x
OR 0
STA x
RLO x
FC 1
Figure 12-7
Establishing the Natural Logarithm of a Floating-Point Number
12-11
12.10 Establishing the Exponential Value of a Floating-Point Number
Description
With the Establishing the Exponential Value of a Floating-Point Number instruction you can establish the exponential value of a floating-point number to base e (= 2.71828...). You can find information on the effects that the instruction EXP has on the status bits CC 1, CC 0, OV and OS in Section 12.6.
Table 12-11 Box EXP and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Exponent of the number
LAD Box
EXP EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
EXP EN ENO IN OUT
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
MD0
The box EXP is activated when I 0.0 = 1. The result of EXP (MD0) is stored in the memory double word MD10. If MD0 < 0 or if the result is outside of the permissible area for floating-point numbers or if the signal state of I 0.0 = 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
OV x
OS x
OR 0
STA x
RLO x
FC 1
Figure 12-8
Establishing the Exponential Value of a Floating-Point Number
12-12
12.11 Establishing the Trigonometrical Functions of Angles as Floating-Point Numbers

Description With the following instructions, you can establish the trigonometrical functions of angles represented as 32-bit IEEE floating-point numbers.
Instruction SIN ASIN Explanation Establish the sine of an angle given in the radian measure. Establish the arc sine of a floating-point number. The result is an angle that is given in the radian measure. The value lies within the following range: p / 2 v arc sine v + p / 2, where p = 3.14. Establish the cosine of a floating-point number from an angle given in the radian measure. Establish the arc cosine of a floating-point number. The result is an angle that is given in the radian measure. The value lies within the following range: 0 v arc cosinev + p, where p = 3.14... Establish the tangent of a floating-point number from an angle given in the radian measure. Establish the arc tangent of a floating-point number. The result is an angle that is given in the radian measure. The value lies within the following range: p / 2 v arc tangent v + p / 2, where p = 3.14...
COS ACOS
TAN ATAN
You can find information on the effects that the instructions SIN, ASIN, COS, ACOS, TAN and ATAN have on the status bits CC 1, CC 0, OV and OS in Section 12.6.
Parameters
Tables 12-12 to 12-17 show the boxes SIN, ASIN, COS, ACOS, TAN and ATAN and describe the parameters.
Table 12-12 Box SIN and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Sine of the number
LAD Box
SIN EN ENO IN OUT
12-13
Table 12-13
Box ASIN and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Arc sine of the number
LAD Box
ASIN EN ENO IN OUT
Table 12-14
Box COS and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Cosine of the number
LAD Box
COS EN ENO IN OUT
Table 12-15
Box ACOS and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Arc cosine of the number
LAD Box
ACOS EN ENO IN OUT
12-14
Table 12-16
Box TAN and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Tangent of the number
LAD Box
TAN EN ENO IN OUT
Table 12-17
Box ATAN and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Number Arc tangent of the number
LAD Box
ATAN EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
SIN EN ENO IN OUT
NOT MD10
Q 4.0 S
MD0
The box SIN is activated when I 0.0 = 1. The result of SIN (MD0) is stored in the memory double word MD10. If the result is outside of the permissible area for floating-point numbers or if the signal state of I 0.0 = 0, output Q 4.0 is set.
OV x
OS x
OR 0
STA x
RLO x
FC 1
Figure 12-9
Establishing the Sine of a Floating-Point Number
12-15
12-16
Comparison Instructions
Chapter Overview
Section 13.1 13.2 13.3 Compare Integer Compare Double Integer Compare Floating-Point Numbers Description
13
Page 13-2 13-3 13-5
13-1
13.1 Compare Integer

Description The Compare Integer instruction carries out a compare operation on the basis of 16-bit floating-point numbers. You can use this instruction like a normal contact. This instruction compares inputs IN1 and IN2 according to the type of comparison you select from the browser. Table 13-1 lists the valid comparisons. If the comparison is true, the result of logic operation (RLO) of the comparison is 1. Otherwise, it is 0. There is no negation of the compare output because this logic can also be handled by the inverse compare function.
Table 13-1 Types of Comparisons for Integers Type of Comparison IN1 is equal to IN2. IN1 is not equal to IN2. IN1 is greater than IN2. IN1 is less than IN2. IN1 is greater than or equal to IN2. IN1 is less than or equal to IN2. Table 13-2 Compare Integer Box and Parameters Parameter IN1 Data Type INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description First value to compare Symbols in Name at Top of Box == <> > < >= <=
LAD Box CMP == I IN1 IN2
IN2
INT
I Q I, Q, M M, D D, L
Second value to compare
I 0.0
I 0.1 MW0 MW2
CMP == I IN1 IN2
I 0.2
Q 4.0 S
Output Q 4.0 is set if the following conditions exist: S There is a signal state of 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 S And MW0 = MW2 S And there is a signal state of 1 at input I 0.2
Status Word Bits Comparison is true: Write BR CC 1 x CC 0 x OV 0 OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC 1
Figure 13-1
Compare Integer
13-2
13.2 Compare Double Integer
Description
The Compare Double Integer instruction carries out a compare operation on the basis of 32-bit floating-point numbers. You can use this instruction like a normal contact. This instruction compares inputs IN1 and IN2 according to the type of comparison you select from the browser. Table 13-3 lists the valid comparisons. If the comparison is true, the result of logic operation (RLO) of the function is 1. Otherwise it is 0. There is no negation of the compare output, because this logic can also be handled by the inverse compare function.
Table 13-3 Types of Comparisons for Double Integers Type of Comparison IN1 is equal to IN2. IN1 is not equal to IN2. IN1 is greater than IN2. IN1 is less than IN2. IN1 is greater than or equal to IN2. IN1 is less than or equal to IN2. Symbols in Name at Top of Box == <> > < >= <=
Table 13-4
Compare Double Integer Box and Parameters (Example: not equal) Parameter IN1 Data Type DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description First value to compare
LAD Box CMP <> D IN1 IN2
IN2
DINT
13-3
I 0.0
I 0.1 MD0 MD4
CMP == D IN1 IN2
I 0.2
Q 4.0 S
Output Q 4.0 is set if the following conditions exist: S There is a signal state of 1 at inputs I 0.0 and at I 0.1 S And MD0 = MD4 S And there is a signal state of 1 at input I 0.2
Status Word Bits Comparison is true: BR CC 1 x CC 0 x OV 0 OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC 1
Write
Figure 13-2
Compare Double Integer
13-4
13.3 Compare Floating-Point Numbers

Description The Compare Floating-Point Numbers instruction triggers a comparison operation. You can use this instruction like a normal contact. This instruction compares inputs IN1 and IN2 according to the type of comparison you select from the browser. Table 13-5 lists the valid comparisons. If the comparison is true, the result of logic operation (RLO) of the function is 1. Otherwise it is 0. There is no negation of the compare output, because this logic can also be handled by the inverse compare function.
Table 13-5 Types of Comparisons for Floating-Point Numbers Type of Comparison IN1 is equal to IN2. IN1 is not equal to IN2. IN1 is greater than IN2. IN1 is less than IN2. IN1 is greater than or equal to IN2. IN1 is less than or equal to IN2. Symbols in Name at Top of Box == <> > < >= <=
Table 13-6
Compare Floating-Point Numbers: Box and Parameters (Example: less than) Parameter IN1 Data Type REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L Description First value to compare
LAD Box CMP <R IN1 IN2
IN2
REAL
I 0.0
I 0.1 MD0 MD4 IN1 IN2
CMP == R
I 0.2
Q 4.0 S
Output Q 4.0 is set if the following conditions exist: S There is a signal state of 1 at inputs I 0.0 and I 0.1 S And MD0 = MD4 S And there is a signal state of 1 at input I 0.2
Status Word Bits Comparison is true: Write Figure 13-3 BR CC 1 x CC 0 x OV x OS x OR x STA 1 RLO x FC 1
Compare Floating-Point Numbers
13-5
13-6
Move and Conversion Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11 14.12 14.13 14.14 14.15 14.16 Assign a Value BCD to Integer Integer to BCD Integer to Double Integer BCD to Double Integer Double Integer to BCD Double Integer to Floating-Point Number Ones Complement Integer Ones Complement Double Integer Twos Complement Integer Twos Complement Double Integer Negate Floating-Point Number Round to Double Integer Truncate Double Integer Part Ceiling Floor Description
14
Page 14-2 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-7 14-8 14-9 14-10 14-11 14-12 14-13 14-14 14-15 14-16 14-17 14-18
14-1
14.1 Assign a Value
Description
The Assign a Value instruction enables you to pre-assign a variable with a specific value. The value specified at the IN input is copied to the address specified at the OUT output. ENO has the same signal state as EN. With the MOVE box, the Assign a Value instruction can copy all data types that are 8, 16, or 32 bits in length. User-defined data types such as arrays or structures have to be copied with the Direct Word Move integrated system function (see the Programming Manual /234/). The Assign a Value instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR). For more information on how the MCR functions, see Section 20.5. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Assign a Value box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-1
Assign a Value Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL All data types that are 8, 16, and 32 bits in length All data types that are 8, 16, and 32 bits in length Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Description Enable input Enable output Source value
LAD Box
MOVE EN ENO
ENO IN
IN
OUT OUT
I, Q, M, D, L
Destination address
I 0.0
MOVE EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0
The instruction is executed if the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1. The content of memory word MW10 is copied to data word 12 of the open DB. Output Q 4.0 is 1 if the operation is executed.
MW10
DBW12
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR 1 CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR STA 1 RLO 1 FC x
Figure 14-1
Assign a Value
14-2
Pre-Assigning a Specific Value to a Variable
For information on integrated system functions that act as move instructions which can pre-assign a specific value to a variable or which can copy variables of varying types, see the Programming Manual /234/.
14-3
14.2 BCD to Integer
Description
The BCD to Integer conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a three-digit number in binary coded decimal format (BCD, " 999) and converts this number to an integer value. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. If a place of a BCD number is in the invalid range of 10 to 15, a BCDF error occurs during an attempted conversion.
S The CPU goes into the STOP mode. BCD Conversion Error is entered
in the diagnostic buffer with event ID number 2521.
S If OB121 is programmed, it is called. For more information on

programming OB121, see the Programming Manual /234/. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the BCD to Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-2 BCD to Integer Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN BCD_I BCD I EN ENO IN OUT ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL WORD INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Number in BCD format Integer value of BCD number Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
BCD_I EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MW12
MW10
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory word MW10 is read as a three-digit number in BCD format and converted to an integer. The result is stored in memory word MW12. If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR 1 CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA 1 RLO 1 FC x
Figure 14-2
BCD to Integer
14-4
14.3 Integer to BCD
Description
The Integer to BCD conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as an integer value and converts this value to a three-digit number in binary coded decimal format (BCD, " 999). The output parameter OUT provides the result. If an overflow occurs, ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Integer to BCD conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-3
Integer to BCD Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL INT WORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Integer number Result in BCD format Description
LAD Box I_BCD I BCD EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MW10
I_BCD EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MW12
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory word MW10 is read as an integer and converted to a three-digit number in BCD format. The result is stored in memory word MW12. If an overflow occurred, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state at input EN is 0 (that is, if the conversion is not executed), the signal state of output Q 4.0 is also 1.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR 1 CC 1 CC 0 OV x OS x OR 0 STA 1 RLO x FC x
Figure 14-3
Integer to BCD
14-5
14.4 Integer to Double Integer
Description
The Integer to Double Integer conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as an integer and converts the integer to a double integer. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Integer to Double Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-4
Integer to Double Integer Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL INT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to convert Result Description
LAD Box I_DI I DI EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
I_DI EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
MW10
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory word MW10 is read as an integer and converted to a double integer. The result is stored in memory double word MD12. If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
Status Word Bits
Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR 1 CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA 1 RLO 1 FC x
Figure 14-4
Integer To Double Integer
14-6
14.5 BCD to Double Integer
Description
The BCD to Double Integer conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a seven-digit number in binary coded decimal format (BCD, " 9,999,999) and converts this number to a double integer value. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. If a place of a BCD number is in the invalid range of 10 to 15, a BCDF error occurs during an attempted conversion.
S The CPU goes into the STOP mode. BCD Conversion Error is entered
in the diagnostic buffer with event ID number 2521.
S If OB121 is programmed, it is called. For more information on

programming OB121, see the Programming Manual /234/. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the BCD to Double Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-5 BCD to Double Integer Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Number in BCD format Double integer value of BCD number Description
LAD Box BCD_DI BCD DI EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
BCD_DI EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
MD8
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as a seven-digit number in BCD format and converted to a double integer. The result is stored in memory double word MD12. If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
Figure 14-5
BCD to Double Integer
14-7
14.6 Double Integer to BCD
Description
The Double Integer to BCD conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a double integer value and converts this value to a seven-digit number in BCD format (" 9,999,999). The output parameter OUT provides the result. If an overflow occurs, ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Double Integer to BCD conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-6
Double Integer to BCD Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Double integer number Result in BCD format Description
LAD Box DI_BCD DI BCD EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MD8
DI_BCD EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as a double integer and converted to a seven-digit number in BCD format. The result is stored in memory double word MD12. If an overflow occurred, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state at input EN is 0 (that is, if the conversion is not executed), the signal state of output Q 4.0 is also 1.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV x OS x OR x STA 1 RLO x FC x
Figure 14-6
Double Integer to BCD
14-8
14.7 Double Integer to Floating-Point Number
Description
The Double Integer to Floating-Point Number conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a double integer value and converts this value to a real number. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Double Integer to Real conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-7
Double Integer to Floating-Point Number Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to convert Result Description
LAD Box DI_R DI R EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MD8
DI_R EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as an integer and converted to a real number. The result is stored in memory double word MD12. If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO=EN).
Figure 14-7
Double Integer to Floating-Point Number
14-9
14.8 Ones Complement Integer
Description
The Ones Complement Integer instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN and performs the Boolean word logic instruction Exclusive Or Word (see Section 15.6) masked by FFFFH, so that every bit is changed to its opposite value. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Ones Complement Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-8
Ones Complement Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL INT INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Input value Ones complement integer Description
LAD Box INV_I INV I EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
INV_I EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MW10
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. Every bit in MW8 is reversed. MW8 = 00000000 00000000 MW10 = 11111111 11111111 If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
MW8
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC x
Write
Figure 14-8
Ones Complement Integer
14-10
14.9 Ones Complement Double Integer
Description
The Ones Complement Double Integer instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN and performs the Boolean word logic operation Exclusive Or Word (see Section 15.6) masked by FFFF FFFFH, so that every bit is changed to the opposite value. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Ones Complement Double Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-9
Ones Complement Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Input value Ones complement double integer Description
LAD Box INV_DI INV DI EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
INV_DI EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD10
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. Each bit of memory double word MD8 is changed: MD8 =FFFF FFFF MD12 = 0000 0000 If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
MD8
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC x
Figure 14-9
Ones Complement Double Integer
14-11
14.10 Twos Complement Integer
Description
The Twos Complement Integer instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN and changes the sign (for example, from a positive value to a negative value). The output parameter OUT provides the result. If the signal state of EN is 0, then the signal state of ENO is 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 and an overflow occurs, the signal state of ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Twos Complement Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-10
Twos Complement Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL INT INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Input value Twos complement integer Description
LAD Box NEG_I NEG I EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
NEG_I EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MW10
MW8
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The value of memory word MW8 is provided at OUT in memory word MW10 with the opposite sign, as shown in the following example: MW8 = +10 MW10 = 10 If the signal state of EN is 1 and an overflow occurs, the signal state of ENO is 0 and the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
Figure 14-10
Twos Complement Integer
14-12
14.11 Twos Complement Double Integer
Description
The Twos Complement Double Integer instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN and changes the sign (for example, from a positive value to a negative value). The output parameter OUT provides the result. If the signal state of EN is 0, then the signal state of ENO is 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 and an overflow occurs, the signal state of ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Twos Complement Double Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-11
Twos Complement Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Input value Twos complement double integer Description
LAD Box NEG_DI NEG DI EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0
NEG_DI EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
MD8
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The value of memory double word MD8 is provided at OUT in memory double word MD10 with the opposite sign, as shown in the following example: MD8 = +60.000 MD10 = 60.000. If the signal state of EN is 1 and an overflow occurs, the signal state of ENO is 0 and the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
OV x
OS x
OR x
STA 1
RLO x
FC x
Figure 14-11
Twos Complement Double Integer
14-13
14.12 Negate Floating-Point Number

The Negate Floating-Point Number instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN and inverts the sign bit, that is, the instruction changes the sign of the number (for example from 0 for plus to 1 for minus). The bits of the exponent and mantissa remain the same. The output parameter OUT provides the result. ENO and EN always have the same signal state. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Negate Floating-Point Number conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-12 Negate Floating-Point Number Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Input value The result is the negated form of the input value. Description
LAD Box NEG_R NEG R EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MD8
NEG_R EN ENO IN OUT
Q 4.0 NOT MD12
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The value of memory double word MD8 is provided at OUT in memory double word MD12 with the opposite sign, as shown in the following example: MD8 = +6.234 x 10 3 MD12 = 6.234 x 10 3 If the conversion is not executed, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 (ENO = EN).
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA x RLO x FC 1
Write
Figure 14-12
Negate Floating-Point Number
14-14
14.13 Round to Double Integer
Description
The Round to Double Integer conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a real number and converts this number to a double integer, by rounding it to the nearest whole number. The result is the nearest integer component (that is, the nearest whole number). The output parameter OUT provides the result. If an overflow occurs, ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Round to Double Integer conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-13
Round to Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to round IN rounded to nearest whole number Description
LAD Box ROUND EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MD8
ROUND EN IN ENO OUT NOT MD12
Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as a real number and converted to a double integer. The result of this round-to-nearest function is stored in memory double word MD12. If an overflow occurred, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state at input EN is 0 (that is, if the conversion is not executed), the signal state of output Q 4.0 is also 1.
Figure 14-13
Round to Double Integer
14-15
14.14 Truncate Double Integer Part
Description
The Truncate Double Integer Part conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a real number and converts this number to a double integer, by rounding it to the nearest lower or equal whole number. The result is the integer component of the specified real number (that is, the whole number part of the real number). The output parameter OUT provides the result. If an overflow occurs, ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Truncate Double Integer Part conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-14
Truncate Double Integer Part Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to round Whole number part of IN value Description
LAD Box TRUNC EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MD8
TRUNC EN IN ENO OUT NOT MD12
Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as a real number and converted to a double integer. The integer component is the result and is stored in memory double word MD12. If an overflow occurred, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state at input EN is 0 (that is, if the conversion is not executed), the signal state of output Q 4.0 is also 1.
Figure 14-14
Truncate Double Integer Part
14-16
14.15 Ceiling
Description
The Ceiling conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a real number and converts this number to a double integer. The result is the lowest integer component which is greater than or equal to the specified real number. The output parameter OUT provides the result. If an overflow occurs, ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Ceiling conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-15
Ceiling Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to convert Result Description
LAD Box CEIL EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 EN MD8 IN
CEIL ENO OUT NOT MD12
Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as a real number and converted to a double integer by rounding to the next higher (or equal) whole number. The result is stored in memory double word MD12. If an overflow occurred, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state at input EN is 0 (that is, if the conversion is not executed), the signal state of output Q 4.0 is also 1.
Figure 14-15
Ceiling
14-17
14.16 Floor
Description
The Floor conversion instruction reads the contents specified in the input parameter IN as a real number and converts this number to a double integer. The result is the highest integer component which is lower than or equal to the specified real number. The output parameter OUT provides the result. If an overflow occurs, ENO is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Floor conversion box (see Section 6.1).
Table 14-16
Floor Conversion Box and Parameters Parameter EN ENO IN OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL REAL DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to convert Result Description
LAD Box FLOOR EN ENO IN OUT
I 0.0 MD8
FLOOR EN IN ENO OUT NOT MD12
Q 4.0
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the conversion is executed. The contents of memory double word MD8 is read as a real number and converted to a double integer by rounding to the next lower (or equal) whole number. The result is stored in memory double word MD12. If an overflow occurred, the signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1. If the signal state at input EN is 0 (that is, if the conversion is not executed), the signal state of output Q 4.0 is also 1.
Figure 14-16
Floor
14-18
Word Logic Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 Overview WAnd Word WAnd Double Word WOr Word WOr Double Word WXOr Word WXOr Double Word Description
15
Page 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 15-7 15-8
15-1
15.1 Overview
What Are Word Logic Instructions?
Word logic instructions compare pairs of words (16 bits) and double words (32 bits) bit by bit, according to Boolean logic. The following instructions are available for performing word logic operations:
S (Word) And Word: Combines two words bit by bit, according to the And
truth table.
S (Word) And Double Word: Combines two double words bit by bit,
according to the And truth table.
S (Word) Or Word: Combines two words bit by bit, according to the Or

truth table.
S (Word) Or Double Word: Combines two double words bit by bit,

according to the Or truth table.
S (Word) Exclusive Or Word: Combines two words bit by bit, according to

the Exclusive Or truth table.
S (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word: Combines two double words bit by

bit, according to the Exclusive Or truth table.
15-2
15.2 WAnd Word
Description
A 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the (Word) And Word instruction. This instruction combines the two digital values indicated in inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit, according to the And truth table. The values are interpreted as pure bit patterns. The result can be scanned at the output OUT. ENO has the same signal state as EN. The relationship of the result at output OUT to 0 affects condition code bit CC 1 of the status word as follows:
S If the result at output OUT is not equal to 0, condition code bit CC 1 of

the status word is set to 1.
S If the result at output OUT is equal to 0, condition code bit CC 1 of the

status word is 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of word logic boxes (see Section 6.1).
Table 15-1 (Word) And Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN WAND_W WAND W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT ENO IN1 IN2 OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL WORD WORD WORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for logic operation Second value for logic operation Result of logic operation Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
WAND_W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
Q 4.0
MW0 2#0000000000001111
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Only bits 0 to 3 are important; the rest of memory word MW0 is masked: IN1 IN2 OUT = = = 0101010101010101 0000000000001111 0000000000000101
MW2
The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if the operation is executed. Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR 1 CC 1 x CC 0 0 OV 0 OS OR x STA 1 RLO 1 FC 1
Figure 15-1
(Word) And Word
15-3
15.3 WAnd Double Word
Description
A 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the (Word) And Double Word instruction. This instruction combines the two digital values indicated in inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit, according to the And truth table. The values are interpreted as pure bit patterns. The result can be scanned at the output OUT. ENO has the same signal state as EN. The relationship of the result at output OUT to 0 affects condition code bit CC 1 of the status word as follows:


Table 15-2 (Word) And Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN WAND_DW WAND DW EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT ENO IN1 IN2 OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD DWORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for logic operation Second value for logic operation Result of logic operation Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
WAND_DW EN ENO
Q 4.0
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Only bits 4 to 11 are important; the rest of memory double word MD4 is masked: IN1 IN2 OUT = 0101010101010101 0101010101010101 = 0000000000000000 0000111111111111 = 0000000000000000 0000010101010000
MD0 DW#16#FF0
IN1 IN2
OUT
MD4
Figure 15-2
(Word) And Double Word
15-4
15.4 WOr Word
Description
A 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the (Word) Or Word instruction. This instruction combines the two digital values indicated in inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit, according to the Or truth table. The values are interpreted as pure bit patterns. The result can be scanned at the output OUT. ENO has the same signal state as EN. The relationship of the result at output OUT to 0 affects condition code bit CC 1 of the status word as follows:


Table 15-3 (Word) Or Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN WOR_W WOR W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT ENO IN1 IN2 OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL WORD WORD WORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for logic operation Second value for logic operation Result of logic operation Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
WOR_W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
Q 4.0
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Bits 0 to 3 are set to 1; the rest of memory word MW0 remains unchanged: IN1 IN2 OUT = 0101010101010101 = 0000000000001111 = 0101010101011111
MW0 2#0000000000001111
MW2
Figure 15-3
(Word) Or Word
15-5
15.5 WOr Double Word
Description
A 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the (Word) Or Double Word instruction. This instruction combines the two digital values indicated in inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit, according to the Or truth table. The values are interpreted as pure bit patterns. The result can be scanned at the output OUT. ENO has the same signal state as EN. The relationship of the result at output OUT to 0 affects condition code bit CC 1 of the status word as follows:


Table 15-4 (Word) Or Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN WOR_DW WOR DW EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT ENO IN1 IN2 OUT Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD DWORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for logic operation Second value for logic operation Result of logic operation Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
WOR_DW EN ENO IN1 IN2
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Q 4.0 Bits 0 to 11 are set to 1; the rest of memory double word MD4 remains unchanged: MD4 IN1 IN2 OUT = 0101010101010101 0101010101010101 = 0000000000000000 0000111111111111 = 0101010101010101 0101111111111111
MD0 DW#16#FFF
OUT
The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if the operation is executed. Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Read Write BR * 1 CC 1 x CC 0 0 OV 0 OS OR * x STA 1 RLO * 1 FC * 1
Figure 15-4
(Word) Or Double Word
15-6
15.6 WXOr Word
Description
A 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the (Word) Exclusive Or Word instruction. This instruction combines the two digital values indicated in inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit, according to the XOr truth table. The values are interpreted as pure bit patterns. The result can be scanned at the output OUT. ENO has the same signal state as EN. The relationship of the result at output OUT to 0 affects condition code bit CC 1 of the status word as follows:


Table 15-5 (Word) Exclusive Or Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN WXOR_W WXOR W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT ENO IN1 IN2 O Data Type BOOL BOOL WORD WORD WORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for logic operation Second value for logic operation Result of logic operation Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
WXOR_W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
Q 4.0
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. IN1 IN2 OUT = 0101010101010101 = 0000000000001111 = 0101010101011010
MW0 2#0000000000001111
MW2
Figure 15-5
(Word) XOr Word
15-7
15.7 WXOr Double Word
Description
A 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word instruction. This instruction combines the two digital values indicated in inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit, according to the XOr truth table. The values are interpreted as pure bit patterns. The result can be scanned at the output OUT. ENO has the same signal state as EN. The relationship of the result at output OUT to 0 affects condition code bit CC 1 of the status word as follows:


Table 15-6 (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN WXOR_DW WXOR DW EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT ENO IN1 IN2 O Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD DWORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output First value for logic operation Second value for logic operation Result of logic operation Description
LAD Box
I 0.0
WXOR_DW EN ENO IN1 IN2
Q 4.0
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. IN1 IN2 OUT = 0101010101010101 0101010101010101 = 0000000000000000 0000111111111111 = 0101010101010101 0101010101010101
MD0 DW#16#FFF
OUT
MD4
The signal state of output Q 4.0 is 1 if the operation is executed.
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR 1 CC 1 x CC 0 0 OV 0 OS OR x STA 1 RLO 1 FC 1
Figure 15-6
WXOr Double Word
15-8
Shift and Rotate Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 16.1 16.2 Shift Instructions Rotate Instructions Description
16
Page 16-2 16-10
16-1
16.1 Shift Instructions
Shift Instructions
You can use the Shift instructions to move the contents of input IN bit by bit to the left or the right. Shifting to the left multiplies the contents of input IN by 2 to the power n (2n); shifting to the right divides the contents of input IN by 2 to the power n (2n). For example, if you shift the binary equivalent of the decimal value 3 to the left by 3 bits, you obtain the binary equivalent of the decimal value 24 in the accumulator. If you shift the binary equivalent of the decimal value 16 to the right by 2 bits, you obtain the binary equivalent of the decimal value 4 in the accumulator. The number that you supply for input parameter N indicates the number of bits by which to shift. The bit places that are vacated by the Shift instruction are either filled with zeros or with the signal state of the sign bit (a 0 stands for positive and a 1 stands for negative). The signal state of the bit that is shifted last is loaded into the CC 1 bit of the status word (see Section 6.3). The CC 0 and OV bits of the status word are reset to 0. You can use jump instructions to evaluate the CC 1 bit. The following Shift instructions are available:
S Shift Left Word, Shift Left Double Word S Shift Right Word, Shift Right Double Word S Shift Right Integer, Shift Right Double Integer
Shift Left Word A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Shift Left Word instruction. This instruction shifts bits 0 to 15 of input IN bit by bit to the left. There is no carry to bit 16. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to shift. If N is larger than 16, the command writes a 0 into the low word of accumulator 1 and resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. The bit positions at the right are padded with zeros. The result of the shift operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Shift Left Word box (see Section 6.1).
16-2
Parameters: IN N OUT 0 0 0 0 1 These five bits are lost. 1
15... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
...8
7... 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
...0
6 places 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
The vacated places are filled with zeros. The signal state of the bit that is shifted out last is stored in bit CC 1 of the status word (same as the signal state of ENO).
Table 16-1
Shift Left Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL WORD WORD WORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to shift Number of bit positions by which to shift Result of shift operation Description
LAD Box SHL_W SHL W EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
I 0.0
SHL_W EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MW4
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory word MW0 is shifted to the left by the number of bits specified in memory word MW2. The result is put into memory word MW4. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q4.0 is set.
MW0 MW2
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR x CC 1 x CC 0 x OV 0 OS OR x STA 1 RLO x FC x
Figure 16-1
Shift Left Word
16-3
Shift Left Double Word
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Shift Left Double Word instruction. This instruction shifts bits 0 to 31 of input IN bit by bit to the left. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to shift. If N is larger than 32, the command writes a 0 in output 0 and resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. The bit positions at the right are padded with zeros. The result of the shift operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0 if N is not equal to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Shift Left Double Word box (see Section 6.1).
Table 16-2
Shift Left Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD WORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to shift Number of bit positions by which to shift Result of shift operation Description
LAD Box SHL_DW SHL DW EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
I 0.0
SHL_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory double word MD0 is shifted to the left by the number of bits specified in memory word MW4. The result is put into memory double word MD10. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MD0 MW4
Status Word Bits Function is executed (EN = 1): Write BR x CC 1 x CC 0 x OV x OS OR x STA x RLO x FC 1
Figure 16-2
Shift Left Double Word
16-4
Shift Right Word
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Shift Right Word instruction. This instruction shifts bits 0 to 15 of input IN bit by bit to the right. Bits 16 to 31 are not affected. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to shift. If N is larger than 16, the command writes a 0 in output 0 and resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. The bit positions at the left are padded with zeros. The result of the shift operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the OV bit of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Shift Right Word box (see Section 6.1).
Table 16-3
Shift Right Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL WORD WORD WORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to shift Number of bit positions by which to shift Result of shift operation Description
LAD Box SHR_W SHR W EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N O
I 0.0
SHR_W EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MW4
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory word MW0 is shifted to the right by the number of bits specified in memory word MW2. The result is put into memory word MW4. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MW0 MW2
Figure 16-3
Shift Right Word
16-5
Shift Right Double Word
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Shift Right Double Word instruction. This instruction shifts bits 0 to 31 of input IN bit by bit to the right. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to shift. If N is larger than 32, the command writes a 0 in output 0 and resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. The bit positions at the left are padded with zeros. The result of the shift operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the OV bit of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Shift Right Double Word box (see Section 6.1).
Parameters: IN N OUT
31...
...16 15...
...0
1111 1111 0101 0101 1010 1010 1111 1111 3 places 0001 1111 1110 1010 1011 0101 0101 1111 111 The vacated places are filled with zeros.
The signal state of the bit that is shifted out last is stored in bit CC 1 of the status word (same as the signal state of ENO).
These two bits are lost.
Figure 16-4 Table 16-4
Shifting Bits of Input IN Three Bits to the Right Shift Right Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD WORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to shift Number of bit positions by which to shift Result of shift operation Description
LAD Box SHR DW SHR_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
16-6
I 0.0
SHR_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory double word MD0 is shifted to the right by the number of bits specified in memory word MW4. The result is put into MD10. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MD0 MW4
Figure 16-5
Shift Right Double Word
Shift Right Integer
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Shift Right Integer instruction. This instruction shifts bits 0 to 15 of input IN bit by bit to the right. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to shift. If N is larger than 16, the command behaves as if N were 16. The bit positions at the left are padded according to the signal state of bit 15 (which is the sign of an integer number), that is, they are filled with zeros if the number is positive, and with ones if it is negative. The result of the shift operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Shift Right Integer box (see Section 6.1).
16-7
Parameters: IN N OUT
15... 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
...8 1
7... 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
...0 0
Sign bit 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
4 places 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
The vacated places are filled with the signal state of the sign bit.
The signal state of the bit that is shifted out last is stored in bit CC 1 of the status word (same as the signal state of ENO).
These three bits are lost.
Shifting Bits of Input IN Four Bits to the Right with Sign Shift Right Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL INT WORD INT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to shift Number of bit positions by which to shift Result of shift operation Description
LAD Box SHR_I SHR I EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
I 0.0
SHR_I EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MW4
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory word MW0 is shifted to the right by the number of bits specified in memory word MW2. The result is put into memory word MW4. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MW0 MW2
Figure 16-7
Shift Right Integer
16-8
Shifting Right Double Integer
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Shift Right Double Integer instruction. This instruction shifts the entire contents of input IN bit by bit to the right. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to shift. If N is larger than 32, the command behaves as if N were 32. The bit positions at the left are padded according to the signal state of bit 31 (which is the sign of a double integer number), that is, they are filled with zeros if the number is positive, and with ones if it is negative. The result of the shift operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Shift Right Double Integer box (see Section 6.1).
Table 16-6
Shift Right Double Integer Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DINT WORD DINT Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to shift Number of bit positions by which to shift Result of shift operation Description
LAD Box SHR_DI SHR DI EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
I 0.0
SHR_DI EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory double word MD0 is shifted to the right by the number of bits specified in memory word MW4. The result is put into memory double word MD10. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MD0 MW4
Figure 16-8
Shift Right Double Integer
16-9
16.2 Rotate Instructions
Description
You can use the Rotate instructions to rotate the entire contents of input IN bit by bit to the left or to the right. The vacated bit places are filled with the signal states of the bits that are shifted out of input IN. The number that you supply for input parameter N specifies the number of bits by which to rotate. Depending on the instruction, rotation takes place via the CC 1 bit of the status word (see Section 6.3). The CC 0 bit of the status word is reset to 0. The following Rotate instructions are available:
S Rotate Left Double Word S Rotate Right Double Word

Rotate Left Double Word A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Rotate Left Double Word instruction. This instruction rotates the entire contents of input IN bit by bit to the left. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to rotate. If N is larger than 32, the double word is rotated ((N1) modulo 32) +1) places. The bit positions at the right are filled with the signal states of the bits rotated. The result of the rotate operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word, see Figure 16-9). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Rotate Left Double Word box (see Section 6.1).
Parameters: IN N
31...
...16 15...
...0
1111 0000 1010 1010 0000 1111 0000 1111 3 places
OUT
111
1000 0101 0101 0000 0111 1000 0111 1111
The signal states of the three bits that are shifted out are inserted in the vacated places.
The signal state of the last bit shifted is also stored in bit CC 1 (same as the signal state of ENO).
Figure 16-9
Rotating Bits of Input IN Three Bits to the Left
16-10
Table 16-7
Rotate Left Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD WORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to rotate Number of bit positions by which to rotate Result of rotate operation Description
LAD Box
ROL_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
I 0.0
ROL_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory double word MD0 is rotated to the left by the number of bits specified in memory word MW4. The result is put into memory double word MD10. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MD0 MW4
Figure 16-10
Rotate Left Double Word
Rotate Right Double Word
A signal state of 1 at the Enable (EN) input activates the Rotate Right Double Word instruction. This instruction rotates the entire contents of input IN bit by bit to the right. Input N specifies the number of bits by which to rotate. The value of N can be between 0 and 31. If N is larger than 32, the double word is rotated ((N1) modulo 32) +1) places. The bit positions at the left are filled with the signal states of the bits rotated. The result of the rotate operation can be scanned at output OUT. The operation triggered by this instruction always resets the CC 0 and OV bits of the status word to 0. If the box is executed (EN = 1), ENO shows the signal state of the bit shifted last (same as CC 1 and RLO in the status word). The result is that other functions following this box that are connected by the ENO (cascade arrangement) are not executed if the bit shifted last had a signal state of 0. Certain restrictions apply to the placement of the Rotate Right Double Word box (see Section 6.1).
16-11
Parameters: IN N
31...
...16 15...
...0
1010 1010 0000 1111 0000 1111 0101 0101 3 places
OUT
1011 0101 0100 0001 1110 0001 1110 1010 101 The signal states of the three bits that are shifted out are inserted in the vacated places.
The signal state of the last bit shifted is also stored in bit CC 1 (same as the signal state of ENO).
Rotating Bits of Input IN Three Bits to the Right Rotate Right Double Word Box and Parameters Parameter EN Data Type BOOL BOOL DWORD WORD DWORD Memory Area I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L Enable input Enable output Value to rotate Number of bit positions by which to rotate Result of rotate operation Description
LAD Box
ROR_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
ENO IN N OUT
I 0.0
ROR_DW EN ENO IN N OUT
Q 4.0 S MD10
A signal state of 1 at input I 0.0 activates the instruction. Memory double word MD0 is rotated to the right by the number of bits specified in memory word MW4. The result is put into memory double word MD10. If the signal state of the bit shifted last was 1, output Q 4.0 is set.
MD0 MW4
Figure 16-12
Rotate Right Double Word
16-12
Data Block Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 17.1 Description Open Data Block: DB or DI
17
Page 17-2
17-1
Data Block Instructions
17.1 Open Data Block: DB or DI
Description
You can use the Open Data Block: DB or DI instruction to open an already existing data block as DB or DI. The number of the data block is transferred in the DB or DI register. The subsequent DB and DI commands access the corresponding blocks depending on the register contents.
Open Data Block: DB or DI Element and Parameters, with International Short Name Parameter Number of DB or DI Data Type BLOCK_DB Memory Area Description The number range of DB or DI depends on your CPU.
Table 17-1
LAD Element <DB number> or <DI number> OPN
Table 17-2
Open Data Block: DB or DI Element and Parameters, with SIMATIC Short Name Parameter Number of DB or DI Data Type BLOCK_DB Memory Area Description The number range of DB or DI depends on your CPU.
LAD Element <DB number> or <DI number> AUF
DB10 OPN
DBX0.0
Q 4.0
DB10 is the currently opened data block. That is why the scan at DBX0.0 refers to bit 0 of data byte 0 of data block DB10. The signal state of this bit is assigned to output Q 4.0.
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR STA RLO FC
Write
This instruction does not read or change the bits of the status word.
Figure 17-1
Open Data Block: DB or DI
17-2
Jump Instructions
Chapter Overview
Section 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 Overview Jump in the Block If RLO = 1 (Unconditional Jump) Jump in the Block If RLO = 1 (Conditional Jump) Jump in the Block If RLO = 0 (Jump-If-Not) Label Description
18
Page 18-2 18-3 18-4 18-5 18-6
18-1
Jump Instructions
18.1 Overview
Label as Address
The address of a Jump instruction is a label. A label consists of a maximum of four characters. The first character must be a letter of the alphabet; the other characters can be letters or numbers (for example, SEG3). The jump label indicates the destination to which you want the program to jump. You enter the label above the jump coil (see Figure 18-1).
Label as Destination
The destination label must be at the beginning of a network. You enter the destination label at the beginning of the network by selecting LABEL from the ladder logic browser. An empty box appears. In the box, you type the name of the label (see Figure 18-1).
Network 1
SEG3 JMP
Network 2 I 0.1
Q 4.0
. . . Network X SEG3 I 0.4 Q 4.1 R
Figure 18-1
Label as Address and Destination
18-2
Jump Instructions
18.2 Jump in the Block If RLO = 1 (Unconditional Jump)
Description
The Unconditional Jump instruction corresponds to a go to label instruction. No additional LAD element may be positioned between the left power rail and the operation. None of the instructions between the jump operation and the label is executed. You can use this instruction in all logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), and functions (FCs).
Table 18-1
Unconditional Jump Element and Parameters Parameter Name of a label Data Type Memory Area Description The address determines the mark to which the absolute jump is made.
LAD Element <address> JMP
Network 1 CAS1 JMP Network X CAS1 I 0.4 The jump is executed every time. None of the instructions between the jump operation and the label is executed.
Q 4.1 R
Write
Figure 18-2
Unconditional Jump: Go to Label
18-3
Jump Instructions
18.3 Jump in the Block If RLO = 1 (Conditional Jump)
Description
The Conditional Jump instruction corresponds to a go to label instruction if RLO = 1. Use the Ladder element Jump unconditional for this operation but only with an advance logic operation. The conditional jump is only executed when the result of this logic operation is RLO = 1. None of the instructions between the jump operation and the label is executed. You can use this instruction in all logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), and functions (FCs).
Table 18-2
Conditional Jump Element and Parameters Parameter Name of a label Data Type Memory Area Description The address determines the mark to which the jump is made when the RLO = 1.
LAD Element <address> JMP
Network 1 I 0.0 CAS1 JMP If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the jump to label CAS1 is executed. The instruction to reset output Q 4.0 is not executed, even if the signal state of input I 0.3 is 1.
Network 2 I 0.3 Q 4.0 R
Network 3 CAS1 I 0.4 Q 4.1 R
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA 1 RLO 1 FC 0
Write
Figure 18-3
Conditional Jump: Go to Label
18-4
Jump Instructions
18.4 Jump in the Block If RLO = 0 (Jump-If-Not)
Description
The Jump-If-Not instruction corresponds to a go to label instruction that is executed if the RLO is 0. You can use this instruction in all logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), and functions (FCs).
Table 18-3
Jump-If-Not Element and Parameters Parameter Name of a label Data Type Memory Area Description The address determines the mark to which the jump is made when the RLO = 0.
LAD Element <address> JMP N
Network 1 I 0.0 CAS1 JMPN If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0, the jump to label CAS1 is executed. The instruction to reset output Q 4.0 is not executed, even if the signal state of input I 0.3 is 1. None of the instructions between the jump operation and the label is executed.
Network 2 I 0.3 Q 4.0 R
Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA 1 RLO 1 FC 0
Write
Figure 18-4
Jump-If-Not
18-5
Jump Instructions
18.5 Label
Description
LABEL is the identifier for the destination of a jump instruction. For every (JMP) or (JMPN) a label must exist.
Description 4 characters: First character: letter remaining characters: letter or alphanumeric
LAD Element LABEL
Network 1 I 0.0
CAS1 JMP If I 0.0 = 1, the jump to label CAS1 is executed. Due to the jump, the operation Reset output at Q 4.0 is not executed even if I 0.3 = 1.
Network 2 I 0.3
Q 4.0 R
Figure 18-5Label
18-6
Status Bit Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 Overview Exception Bit BR Memory Result Bits Result Bit Unordered Exception Bit Overflow Exception Bit Overflow Stored Description
19
Page 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-6 19-7 19-9
19-1
19.1 Overview
Description
The status bit instructions are bit logic instructions (see Section 8.1) that work with the bits of the status word (see Section 6.3). Each of these instructions reacts to one of the following conditions that is indicated by one or more bits of the status word:
S The binary result bit is set (that is, has a signal state of 1). S The result of a math function is related to 0 in one of the following ways:
Greater than 0 (>0) Less than 0 (<0) Greater than or equal to 0 (>=0) Less than or equal to 0 (<=0) Equal to 0 (==0) Not equal to 0 (<>0)
S The result of a math function is unordered. S A math function had an overflow.

When a status bit instruction is connected in series, it combines the result of its signal state check with the previous result of logic operation according to the And truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-8). When a status bit instruction is connected in parallel, it combines its result with the previous RLO according to the Or truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-9). In this chapter, the Exception Bit BR Memory element, which checks the signal state of the BR (Binary Result) bit of the status word, is shown in its international and SIMATIC form.
Status Word
The status word is a register in the memory of your CPU that contains bits that you can reference in the address of bit and word logic instructions. Figure 19-1 shows the structure of the status word. For more information on the individual bits of the status word, see Section 6.3.
215... ...29 28
BR
27
26
25
OV
24
OS
23
OR
22
STA
21
20
CC 1 CC 0
RLO FC
Figure 19-1
Structure of the Status Word
Parameters
The following LAD elements do not have any enterable parameters.
19-2
19.2 Exception Bit BR Memory
Description
You can use the Exception Bit BR Memory instruction to check the signal state of the BR (Binary Result) bit of the status word (see Section 6.3). When used in series, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous result of logic operation (RLO) according to the And truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-8). When used in parallel, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous RLO according to the Or truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-9).
The Element and Its Negated Form
Figure 19-2 shows the Exception Bit BR Memory element and its negated form. The elements are pictured with their international and SIMATIC short names.
International element BR
SIMATIC element BIE
BR
BIE
Figure 19-2
Exception Bit BR Memory Element and Its Negated Form
I 0.0
BR
Q 4.0 S
I 0.2
Output Q 4.0 is set if the signal state at input I 0.0 is 1 or the signal state at input I 0.2 is 0, and, in addition to this RLO, the signal state of the BR bit is 1.
Write
Figure 19-3
Exception Bit BR Memory
19-3
19.3 Result Bits
Description
You can use the Result Bit instructions to determine the relationship of the result of a math function to zero, that is, if the result is >0, <0, >=0, <=0, ==0, or <>0. This instruction uses a comparison to zero as its address (see Table 19-1). Internally, the CPU goes to the condition code bits of the status word (CC 1 and CC 0, see Section 6.3) and checks the combination of signal states in these locations. The combination tells the CPU the relationship of the result to 0. If the comparison condition indicated in the address is fulfilled, the result of this signal state check is 1. When used in series, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous result of logic operation (RLO) according to the And truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-8). When used in parallel, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous RLO according to the Or truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-9).
Table 19-1
Result Bit Elements and Their Negated Forms Description The Result Bit Greater Than 0 instruction determines whether or not the result of a math function is greater than 0. This instruction checks the combination in the CC 1 and CC 0 (condition code) bits of the status word to determine the relationship of a result to 0.
LAD Element >0 >0 <0 <0
The Result Bit Less Than 0 instruction determines whether or not the result of a math function is less than 0. This instruction checks the combination in the CC 1 and CC 0 (condition code) bits of the status word to determine the relationship of a result to 0.
>=0
>=0
The Result Bit Greater Equal 0 instruction determines whether or not the result of a math function is greater than or equal to 0. This instruction checks the combination in the CC 1 and CC 0 (condition code) bits of the status word to determine the relationship of a result to 0. The Result Bit Less Equal 0 instruction determines whether or not the result of a math function is less than or equal to 0. This instruction checks the combination in the CC 1 and CC 0 (condition code) bits of the status word to determine the relationship of a result to 0.
<=0 <=0
== 0 The Result Bit Equal 0 instruction determines whether or not the result of a math function is equal to 0. This instruction checks the combination in the CC 1 and CC 0 (condition code) bits of the status word to determine the relationship of a result to 0.
== 0
<>0 <>0 The Result Bit Not Equal 0 instruction determines whether or not the result of a math function is not equal to 0. This instruction checks the combination in the CC 1 and CC 0 (condition code) bits of the status word to determine the relationship of a result to 0.
19-4
I 0.0
>0
Q 4.0 S
IW0 IW2
MW10
If the signal state at input I 0.0 is 1, the SUB_I box is activated. If the value of input word IW0 is higher than the value of input word IW2, the result of the math function IW0 IW2 is greater than 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 (activated) and an error occurs while the instruction is being executed, the signal state of ENO is 0. Output Q 4.0 is set if the function is executed properly and the result is greater than 0. If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0 (not activated), the signal state of both EN and ENO is 0. Output Q 4.0 is set if the function is executed properly and the result is less than or equal to 0. If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0 (not activated), the signal state of both EN and ENO is 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 (activated) and an error occurs while the instruction is being executed, the signal state of ENO is 0.
I 0.0
>0
Q 4.0 S
IW0 IW2
MW10
Write
Figure 19-4
Result Bit Greater Than 0 and Negated Result Bit Greater Than 0
19-5
19.4 Exception Bits Unordered
Description
You can use the Exception Bit Unordered instruction to check whether or not the result of a floating-point math function is unordered (that is, if one of the values in the math function is not a valid floating-point number). Therefore, the condition code bits of the status word (CC 1 and CC 0, see Section 6.3) are evaluated. If the result of the math function is unordered (UO) the signal state check produces a result of 1. If the combination in CC 1 and CC 0 does not indicate unordered, the result of the signal state check is 0. When used in series, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous result of logic operation (RLO, see Section 6.3) according to the And truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-8). When used in parallel, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous RLO according to the Or truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-9).

UO
UO
Figure 19-5
Exception Bit Unordered Element and Its Negated Form
I 0.0
DIV_R EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT
UO
Q 4.0 S
ID0 ID4
MD10
If the signal state at input I 0.0 is 1, the DIV_R box is activated. If the value of either input double word ID0 or ID4 is not a valid floating-point number, the floating-point math function is unordered. If the signal state of EN is 1 (activated) and an error occurs while the instruction is being executed, the signal state of ENO is 0. Output Q 4.0 is set if the function DIR_V is executed, but one of the values in the math function is not a valid floating-point number. If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0 (not activated), the signal state of both EN and ENO is 0.
Write
Figure 19-6
Exception Bit Unordered
19-6
19.5 Exception Bit Overflow
Description
You can use the Exception Bit Overflow instruction to recognize an overflow (OV) in the last math function. If, after the system executes a math function, the result is outside the permissible negative range or outside the permissible positive range, the OV bit in the status word (see Section 6.3) is set. The instruction checks the signal state of this bit. This bit is reset by error-free running math functions. When used in series, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous result of logic operation according to the And truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-8). When used in parallel, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous RLO according to the Or truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-9).

OV
OV
Figure 19-7
Exception Bit Overflow Element and Its Negated Form
19-7
Network 1:
I 0.0
SUB_I EN ENO IN2 IN2 OUT MW10
IW0 IW2
If the signal state at input I 0.0 is 1, the SUB_I box is activated. If the result of the math function input word IW0 minus input word IW2 is outside the permissible range for an integer, the OV bit in the status word is set.
Network 2: OV I 0.1 I 0.2 Q 4.0 S I 0.2
The result of a signal state check with OV is 1. Output Q 4.0 is set if the check with OV is 1 and the RLO of network 2 is 1 (that is, if the RLO just prior to output Q 4.0 is 1). If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0 (not activated), the signal state of both EN and ENO is 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 (activated) and the result of the math function is out of range, the signal state of ENO is 0. Note: The check with OV is only necessary because of the different networks. Otherwise, it is possible to take the ENO output of the math function, which is 0 if the result is outside the permissible range.
Write
Figure 19-8
Exception Bit Overflow
19-8
19.6 Exception Bit Overflow Stored
Description
You can use the Exception Bit Overflow Stored instruction to recognize a latching overflow (overflow stored, OS) in a math function. If, after the system executes a math function, the result is outside the permissible negative range or outside the permissible positive range, the OS bit in the status word (see Section 6.3) is set. The instruction checks the signal state of this bit. Unlike the OV (overflow) bit, the OS bit remains set by error-free running math functions (see Section 19.5). When used in series, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous result of logic operation (RLO) according to the And truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-8). When used in parallel, this instruction combines the result of its check with the previous RLO according to the Or truth table (see Section 6.2 and Table 6-9).
OS
OS
Figure 19-9
Exception Bit Overflow Stored Element and Its Negated Form
19-9
Network 1:
I 0.0
MUL_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT MD8
IW0 IW2 Network 2: I 0.1
If the signal state at input I 0.0 is 1, the MUL_I box is activated. If the signal state at input I 0.1 is 1, the ADD_I box is activated. If the result of one of the math functions is outside the permissible range for an integer, the OS bit in the status word is set. The result of a signal state check with OS is 1. Output Q 4.0 is set if the check with OS is 1.
ADD_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT MW12
IW0 IW2 Network 3:
OS
Q 4.0 S
In network 1, if the signal state of input I 0.0 is 0 (not activated), the signal state of both EN and ENO is 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 (activated) and the result of the math function is out of range, the signal state of ENO is 0. In network 2, if the signal state of input I 0.1 is 0 (not activated), the signal state of both EN and ENO is 0. If the signal state of EN is 1 (activated) and the result of the math function is out of range, the signal state of ENO is 0. Note: The check with OS is only necessary because of the different networks. Otherwise it is possible to take the ENO output of the first math function and connect it with the EN input of the second (cascade arrangement).
Write
Figure 19-10
Exception Bit Overflow Stored
19-10
Program Control Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 Description Calling FCs/SFCs from Coil Calling FBs, FCs, SFBs, SFCs, and Multiple Instances Return Master Control Relay Instructions Master Control Relay Activate/Deactivate Master Control Relay On/Off
20
Page 20-2 20-4 20-7 20-8 20-9 20-12
20-1
20.1 Calling FCs/SFCs from Coil
Description
You can use the Call FC/SFC from Coil instruction to call a function (FC) or a system function (SFC) that has no parameters. Depending on the preceding link, the call is conditional or unconditional (see the example in Figure 20-1). In the case of a conditional call, you cannot enter parameters of data type BLOCK_FC in the code section of a function (FC). Within a function block (FB), however, you can enter BLOCK_FC as a parameter type. A conditional call is executed only if the RLO is 1. If a conditional call is not executed, the RLO after the call instruction is 0. If the instruction is executed, it performs the following functions:
S Saves the address that it needs to return to the calling block S Saves the selectors of both current data blocks (DB and DI) S Changes the current local data range to the previous local data range S Pushes the MA bit (MCR Active bit) to the block stack (BSTACK) S Creates the new local data range for the called FC or SFC
After all this, program processing continues in the called block. For information on the passing of parameters, see the Programming Manual /120/.
Table 20-1 Call FC/SFC from Coil Element and Parameter Parameter Data Type Memory Area Description Number of the FC or SFC (for example, FC10 or SFC59). The SFCs that are available depend on your CPU. Number CALL Number BLOCK_FC In the case of a conditional call, you cannot enter parameters of data type BLOCK_FC within a function (FC). Within a function block, however, you can enter BLOCK_FC as a parameter type.
LAD Element
20-2
. . . . . . . . . . . .
DB10 OPN MCRA FC10 CALL I 0.0 Q 4.0
. . . . . . . .
MCRD I 0.1 FC11 CALL
If the unconditional call of FC10 is executed, the CALL instruction performs the following functions:
S Saves the address that it needs to return to the current FB S Saves the selectors for DB10 and for the instance data block of the FB S Pushes the MA bit, set to 1 in the MCRA instruction, to the block stack (BSTACK) and
resets this bit to 0 for the called FC10 Program processing continues in FC10. If you want to use the MCR function in FC10, you must reactivate it there. When FC10 is finished, program processing returns to the calling FB. The MA bit is restored, and DB10 and the instance data block of the user-defined FB are the current DBs again, regardless of which DBs FC10 used. After jumping back from FC10 the signal state of input I 0.0 is assigned to output Q 4.0. The call of FC11 is a conditional call. It is executed only if the signal state of input I 0.1 is 1. If the call is executed, the function is the same as for calling FC10. Status Word Bits Unconditional Call Write Conditional Call Write BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS 0 OR 0 STA 1 RLO 1 FC 0 BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS 0 OR 0 STA 1 RLO FC 0
Figure 20-1
Call FC/SFC from Coil
20-3
20.2 Calling FBs, FCs, SFBs, SFCs, and Multiple Instances
Description
You can call function blocks (FBs), functions (FCs), system function blocks (SFBs), and system functions (SFCs), and multiple instances by selecting them from the Program Elements list box. They are at the end of the list of instruction families under the following names:
S FB Blocks S FC Blocks S SFB Blocks S SFC Blocks S Multiple Instances S Libraries

When you select one of these blocks, a box appears on your screen with the number or symbolic name of the function or function block and the parameters that belong to it. The block that you call must have been compiled and must already exist in your program file, in the library, or on the CPU. If the call FB, FC, SFB, SFC, and multiple instances instruction is executed, it performs the following functions:
S Saves the address that it needs to return to the calling block S Saves the selectors of both current data blocks (DB and DI) S Changes the previous local data range to the current local data range S Pushes the MA bit (MCR Active bit) to the block stack (BSTACK) S Creates the new local data range for the called FC or SFC
Note When the DB and DI registers are saved, they may not point to the data blocks that you opened. Because of the copy-in and copy-out mechanism for passing parameters, especially where function blocks are concerned, the compiler sometimes overwrites the DB register. See the Programming Manual /234/ for more details.
After this, program processing continues in the called block.
20-4
Enable Output
The enable output (ENO) of a Ladder box corresponds to the BR bit of the status word (see Section 6.3). When writing a function block or function that you want to call from Ladder, no matter whether you write the FB or FC in STL or Ladder, you are responsible for managing the BR bit. You should use the SAVE instruction (in STL) or the (SAVE) coil (in Ladder) to store an RLO in the BR bit according to the following criteria:

executed without error.

executed with error You should program these instructions at the end of the FB or FC so that these are the last instructions that are executed in the block. Warning Possible unintentional resetting of the BR bit to 0. When writing FBs and FCs in LAD, if you fail to manage the BR bit as described above, one FB or FC may overwrite the BR bit of another FB or FC. To avoid this problem, store the RLO at the end of each FB or FC as described above.
Effect of the Call on the Bits of the Status Word
Figure 20-2 shows the effects of a conditional and an unconditional call of a block on the bits of the status word (see Section 6.3).
Conditional: Write Unconditional: Write
BR x
CC 1
CC 0
OV
OS 0 0
OR 0 0
STA 1 1
RLO 1
FC x x
Figure 20-2
Effect of a Block Call on the Bits of the Status Word
20-5
Parameters
The parameters that have been defined in the VAR section of the block will be displayed in the ladder box. Supplying parameters differs depending on the type of block as follows:
S For a function (FC), you must supply actual parameters for all of the
formal parameters.
S The entry of actual parameters is optional with function blocks (FBs).

You must, however, attach an instance data block (instance DB) to the FB. If an actual parameter has not been attached to a formal parameter, the FB works with the values that exist in its instance DB.
S With multiple instances, you do not need to specify the instance DB since
the box that is called has already been assigned the DB number (for more information about declaring multiple instances, refer to Section 3.5). For structured IN/OUT parameters and parameters of the types Pointer and Array, you must make an actual parameter available (at least during the first call). Every actual parameter that you make available when calling a function block must have the same data type as its formal parameter. For information on how to program a function or how to work with its parameters, see the Programming Manual /234/. Table 20-2 shows a box for calling FBs, FCs, SFBs, SFCs, and multiple instances and describes the parameters common to the box for all these blocks. When you call your block from the Instruction Browser, the block number appears automatically at the top of the block (number of the FB, FC, SFB, or SFC, for example, FC10).
Table 20-2 Box and Parameters for Calling FBs, FCs, SFBs, SFCs, and Multiple Instances Parameter DB No. Data Type BLOCK_DB Memory Area Description Instance data block number. You need to supply this information for calling FBs only. Enable input Enable output
LAD Box DB No. Block no. EN ENO OUT IN IN/OUT
EN ENO
BOOL BOOL
I, Q, M, D, L I, Q, M, D, L
DB13 FB10 ENO EN Start Run Stop Length
Calls FB10 (using instance DB13) M2.1 The value of this parameter is copied from DB13 into M 2.1 after processing FB10.
Actual addresses, the values of which are copied into instance data block DB13 before processing FB10. Figure 20-3
I 1.0 I 1.1 MW20
Formal parameters of the FB
Call FB from Box
20-6
20.3 Return
Description
You can use the Return instruction to abandon blocks. You can abandon a block conditionally. Return saves the RLO to the BR bit of the status word. If a block is abandoned because of a conditional return, the signal state of the RLO and the BR bit in the block to which program control returns is 1.
Table 20-3
Return Element Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description
LAD Element RET
I 0.0 RET
If the signal state of input I 0.0 is 1, the block is abandoned. The BR bit of the status word then has the same signal state as input I 0.0 (= 1)
Status Word Bits Conditional Return (Return if RLO = 1) Write BR x CC 1 CC 0 OV OS x OR 0 STA 1 RLO 1 FC 0
Figure 20-4
Return
20-7
20.4 Master Control Relay Instructions
Definition of Master Control Relay
The Master Control Relay (MCR, see also Section 20.5) is an American relay ladder logic master switch for energizing and de-energizing power flow (current path). A de-energized current path corresponds to an instruction sequence that writes a zero value instead of the calculated value, or, to an instruction sequence that leaves the existing memory value unchanged. Operations triggered by the instructions shown in Table 20-4 are dependent on the MCR. The Output Coil and Midline Output instructions write a 0 to the memory if the MCR is 0. The Set Coil and Reset Coil instructions leave the existing value unchanged (see Table 20-5).
Table 20-4
Instructions Influenced by an MCR Zone Instruction Name Midline Output Output Coil S R SR RS MOVE Set Coil Reset Coil Set_Reset Flipflop Reset_Set Flipflop Assign a Value Section in This Manual 8.5 8.4 8.8 8.9 8.22 8.23 14.1
Element or Name in Box
Table 20-5
Operations Dependent on MCR and How They React to Its Signal State Output Coil or Midline Output Sector Set or Reset S SR Does not write R RS Writes 0 (Imitates a component that, on loss of voltage, produces a value of 0) Normal execution Assign a Value MOVE # Writes 0
Signal State of MCR
(Imitates a relay that falls to its (Imitates a latching relay that quiet state when voltage is remains in its current state removed) when voltage is removed) Normal execution Normal execution
20-8
20.5 Master Control Relay Activate/Deactivate
MCR Activate
With the instruction Activate Master Control Relay, you switch on the MCR-dependency of subsequent commands. After entering this command, you can program the MCR zones with these instructions (see Section 20.6). When your program activates an MCR area, all MCR actions depend on the content of the MCR stack (see Figure B-4).
Table 20-6
Master Control Relay Activate Element Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description Activates the MCR function
LAD Element MCRA
MCR Deactivate
With the instruction Deactivate Master Control Relay, you switch off the MCR-dependency of subsequent commands. After this instruction, you cannot program any more MCR zones. When your program deactivates an MCR area, the MCR is always energized irrespective of the entries in the MCR stack.
Table 20-7
Master Control Relay Deactivate Element Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description Deactivates the MCR function
LAD Element MCRD
The MCR stack and the bit that controls its dependency (the MA bit) relate to each level and have to be saved and fetched every time you switch to the sequence level. They are preset at the beginning of every sequence level (MCR entry bits 1 to 8 are set to 1, the MCR stack pointer is set to 0 and the MA bit is set to 0). The MCR stack is passed on from block to block and the MA bit is saved and set to 0 every time a block is called. It is fetched back at the end of the block. The MCR can be implemented in such a way that it optimizes the run time of code-generating CPUs. The reason for this is that the dependency of the MCR is not passed on by the block; it must be explicitly activated by an MCR instruction. A code-generating CPU recognizes this instruction and generates the additional code necessary for the evaluation of the MCR stack until it recognizes an MCR instruction or reaches the end of the block. With instructions outside the MCRA/MCRD range, there is no increase of the runtime. The instructions MCRA and MCRD must always be used in pairs within your program.
20-9

OB1 MCRA

FBx MCRA Call FCy

FCy MCRA

MCRD Call FBx MCRA BEU

MCRD
BEU
Operations not dependent on the MCR bit Operations dependent on the MCR bit BEU BEU is an STL instruction. You will find more details in the Reference Manual /102/ Activating and Deactivating an MCR Area
Figure 20-5
The operations programmed between MCRA and MCRD depend on the signal state of the MCR bit. Operations programmed outside an MCRA-MCRD sequence do not depend on the signal state of the MCR bit. If an MCRD instruction is missing, the operations programmed between the instructions MCRA and BEU depend on the MCR bit. (BEU is an STL instruction. You will find more information in Manual /232/.)
20-10
MCRA I 0.0 MCR< I 0.3 . . . Q 4.0 S
I 0.4
Q 4.1
MCR> MCRD The instruction (MCRA) activates the function MCR up to the next MCRD. The instructions between (MCR<) and (MCR>) are processed dependent on the MA bit (here I 0.0):
S If the signal state of input I 0.0 = 1, the following conditions can exist:
Output Q 4.0 is set to 1 if the signal state of input I 0.3 is 1. Output Q 4.0 remains unchanged if the signal state of input I 0.3 is 0. The signal state of input I 0.4 is assigned to output Q 4.1. Output Q 4.0 remains unchanged regardless of the signal state of input I 0.3. Output Q 4.1 is 0 regardless of the signal state of input I 0.4.
S If the signal state of input I 0.0 = 0, the following conditions exist:
Write
Figure 20-6
Master Control Relay (Activate and Deactivate)
You must program the dependency of the functions (FCs) and function blocks (FBs) in the blocks by yourself. If this function or function block is called from an MCRA/MCRD sequence, not all instructions within this sequence are automatically dependent on the MCR bit. To achieve this, use the instruction MCRA of the block called. Warning Risk of personal injury and danger to equipment: Never use the instruction MCR as an EMERGENCY OFF or safety device for personnel. MCR is not a substitute for a hardwired master control relay.
20-11
20.6 Master Control Relay On/Off
MCR On
The Master Control Relay On (MCR<) instruction triggers an operation that pushes the RLO to the MCR stack and opens an MCR zone. The instructions shown in Table 20-4 are influenced by the RLO that is pushed to the RLO stack when the MCR zone is opened. The MCR stack works like a LIFO (Last In, First Out) buffer. Only eight entries are possible. If the stack is already full, the Master Control Relay On instruction produces an MCR stack fault (MCRF).
Master Control Relay On Element Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description Opens an MCR zone
Table 20-8
LAD Element MCR<
MCR Off
The Master Control Relay Off (MCR>) instruction closes the MCR zone that was opened last. The instruction does this by removing the RLO entry from the MCR stack. The RLO was pushed there by the Master Control Relay On instruction. The entry released at the other end of the LIFO (Last In, First Out) MCR stack is set to 1. If the stack is already empty, the Master Control Relay Off instruction produces an MCR stack fault (MCRF).
Master Control Relay Off Element Parameter None Data Type Memory Area Description Closes the MCR zone that was opened last
Table 20-9
LAD Element MCR>
The MCR is controlled by a stack which is one bit wide and eight entries deep (see Figure 20-7). The MCR is activated until all eight entries in the stack are equal to 1. The instruction (MCR<) copies the RLO to the MCR stack. The instruction (MCR>) removes the last entry from the stack and sets the released stack address to 1. If an error occurs e.g. if more than eight (MCR>) instructions follow one another, or you attempt to execute the instruction (MCR>) when the stack is empty this error activates the MCRF error message. The monitoring of the MCR stack follows the stack pointer (MSP: 0 = empty, 1 = one entry, 2 = two entries, ..., 8 = eight entries).
20-12
RLO # RLO RLO MSP ! RLO
Pushed bit " 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
# Pushed bit 1 MA " MCRA 1 MSP = MCR stack pointer
"
" 0 MCRD
MA = Bit for controlling MCR-dependency Figure 20-7 Master Control Relay Stack
The instructions (MCR<) and (MCR>) must always be used in pairs within your program. The instruction (MCR<) takes over the signal state of the RLO and copies it to the MCR bit. The instruction (MCR>) sets the MCR bit absolutely to 1. Because of this characteristic, every other instruction between the instructions (MCRA) and (MCRD) operates independent of the MCR bit (for information on (MCRA) and (MCRD), see above).
Nesting the Instructions (MCR<) and (MCR>)
You can nest the instructions (MCR<) and (MCR>). The maximum nesting depth is eight, i.e. you can write a maximum of eight (MCR<) instructions one after the other before inserting an (MCR>) instruction. You must program an equal number of (MCR<) and (MCR>) instructions. If the (MCR<) instructions are nested, the MCR bit of the lower nesting level is formed. The (MCR<) instruction then links the current RLO with the current MCR bit in accordance with the AND truth table. When an (MCR>) instruction finishes a nesting level, it fetches the MCR bit from the next higher level.
20-13
MCRA I 0.0 MCR < I 0.1 MCR < I 0.3 Q 4.0 S MCR> I 0.4 Q 4.1
MCR> MCRD When the MCRA instruction activates the MCR function, you can create up to eight nested MCR zones. In the example, there are two MCR zones. The first MCR> instruction works together with the second MCR< instruction. All instructions between the second set of MCR brackets (MCR<MCR>) belong to the second MCR zone. The operations are executed as follows:
S If the signal state of input I 0.0 = 1, the signal state of input I 0.4 is assigned to output Q 4.1. S If the signal state of input I 0.0 = 0, the signal state of output Q 4.1 is 0 regardless of S S
the signal state of input I 0.4. Output Q 4.0 remains unchanged regardless of the signal state of input I 0.3. If the signal state of input I 0.0 and I 0.1 = 1, output Q 4.0 is set to 1 if the signal state of input I 0.3 is 1 and output Q 4.1 = input I 0.4. If the signal state of input I 0.1 = 0, output Q 4.0 remains unchanged regardless of the signal state of input I 0.3 and input I 0.0. Status Word Bits BR CC 1 CC 0 OV OS OR 0 STA 1 RLO FC 0
Write
Figure 20-8
Master Control Relay Off
20-14
Appendix
Alphabetical Listing of Instructions Programming Examples Number Representation References
A B C D
T-16
Alphabetical Listing of Instructions

Chapter Overview
Section A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 Description Listing with International Names Listing with International Names and SIMATIC Equivalents Listing with SIMATIC Names Listing with SIMATIC Names and International Equivalents Listing with International Short Names and SIMATIC Short Names
A
Page A-2 A-5 A-9 A-12 A-16
A-1
A.1
Listing with International Names

Table A-1 provides an alphabetical listing of instructions with international full names. Next to each full name is its international short name and a reference to the page on which the instruction is explained in this manual.
Table A-1
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with Short Names Full Name Short Name ADD_DI ADD_I ADD_R NEG POS MOVE BCD_DI BCD_I CALL_FB CALL_FC (CALL) CALL_SFB CALL_SFC CEIL CMP>=D CMP>=I CMP>=R DIV_DI DIV_I DIV_R DI_BCD DI_R S_CD ( CD ) BR | | OV | | OS | | UO | | S_PEXT ( SE ) FLOOR I_BCD I_DI | NOT | Page No. 11-3 11-2 12-3 8-22 8-21 14-2 14-7 14-4 20-4 20-4 20-2 20-4 20-4 14-17 13-3 13-2 13-5 11-9 11-8 12-6 14-8 14-9 10-7 8-13 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 9-7 8-15 14-18 14-5 14-6 8-7
Add Double Integer Add Integer Add Real Address Negative Edge Detection Address Positive Edge Detection Assign a Value BCD to Double Integer BCD to Integer Call FB from Box Call FC from Box Call FC SFC from Coil (without parameters) Call System FB from Box Call System FC from Box Ceiling Compare Double Integer (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Compare Integer (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Compare Real (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Divide Double Integer Divide Integer Divide Real Double Integer to BCD Double Integer to Real Down Counter Down Counter Coil Exception Bit BR Memory Exception Bit Overflow Exception Bit Overflow Stored Exception Bit Unordered Extended Pulse S5 Timer Extended Pulse Timer Coil Floor Integer to BCD Integer to Double Integer Invert Power Flow
A-2
Table A-1
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with Short Names, cont. Full Name Short Name (JMPN) (JMP) (MCRA) (MCRD) (MCR>) (MCR<) (#) MUL_DI MUL_I MUL_R NEG_R BR |/| OV |/| OS |/| UO |/| ==0 |/| >=0 |/| >0 |/| <=0 |/| <0 |/| <>0 |/| ( N ) |/| | | S_OFFDT ( SF ) S_ODT ( SD ) INV_DI INV_I ( OPN ) ( ) ( P ) S_PULSE ( SP ) ( R ) RS ==0 | | >=0 | | >0 | | Page No. 18-5 18-3 20-9 20-9 20-12 20-12 8-6 11-7 11-6 12-5 14-14 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 8-20 8-4 8-3 9-13 8-18 9-9 8-16 14-11 14-10 17-2 8-5 8-19 9-5 8-14 8-10 8-24 19-4 19-4 19-4
Jump-If-Not Jump Master Control Relay Activate Master Control Relay Deactivate Master Control Relay Off Master Control Relay On Midline Output Multiply Double Integer Multiply Integer Multiply Real Negate Real Number Negated Exception Bit BR Memory Negated Exception Bit Overflow Negated Exception Bit Overflow Stored Negated Exception Bit Unordered Negated Result Bit Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Greater Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Greater Than 0 Negated Result Bit Less Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Less Than 0 Negated Result Bit Not Equal 0 Negative RLO Edge Detection Normally Closed Contact (Address) Normally Open Contact (Address) Off-Delay S5 Timer Off-Delay Timer Coil On-Delay S5 Timer On-Delay Timer Coil ONEs Complement Double Integer ONEs Complement Integer Open Data Block: DB or DI Output Coil Positive RLO Edge Detection Pulse S5 Timer Pulse Timer Coil Reset Coil Reset-Set Flipflop Result Bit Equal 0 Result Bit Greater Equal 0 Result Bit Greater Than 0
A-3
Table A-1
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with Short Names, cont. Full Name Short Name <=0 | | <0 | | <>0 | | S_ODTS ( SS ) (RET) MOD ROL_DW ROR_DW ROUND ( SAVE ) ( S ) ( SC ) SR SHL_DW SHL_W SHR_DI SHR_DW SHR_I SHR_W SUB_DI SUB_I SUB_R TRUNC NEG_DI NEG_I S_CU ( CU ) S_CUD WAND_DW WAND_W WXOR_DW WXOR_W WOR_DW WOR_W Page No. 19-4 19-4 19-4 9-11 8-17 20-7 11-10 16-10 16-12 14-15 8-8 8-9 8-11 8-23 16-4 16-2 16-9 16-6 16-7 16-5 11-5 11-4 12-4 14-16 14-13 14-12 10-5 8-12 10-3 15-4 15-3 15-8 15-7 15-6 15-5
Result Bit Less Equal 0 Result Bit Less Than 0 Result Bit Not Equal 0 Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Return Return Fraction Double Integer Rotate Left Double Word Rotate Right Double Word Round to Double Integer Save RLO to BR Memory Set Coil Set Counter Value Set-Reset Flipflop Shift Left Double Word Shift Left Word Shift Right Double Integer Shift Right Double Word Shift Right Integer Shift Right Word Subtract Double Integer Subtract Integer Subtract Real Truncate Double Integer Part TWOs Complement Double Integer TWOs Complement Integer Up Counter Up Counter Coil Up-Down Counter (Word) And Double Word (Word) And Word (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word (Word) Exclusive Or Word (Word) Or Double Word (Word) Or Word
A-4
A.2
Listing with International Names and SIMATIC Equivalents

Table A-2 provides an alphabetical listing of instructions with international full names. Next to each full name is its SIMATIC equivalent and a reference to the page on which the instruction is explained in this manual.
Table A-2
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with SIMATIC Equivalents International Name SIMATIC Name Ganze Zahlen addieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen addieren (16 Bit) Realzahlen addieren Signalflanke 10 abfragen Signalflanke 01 abfragen Wert bertragen BCD-Zahl in Ganzzahl (32 Bit) wandeln BCD-Zahl in Ganzzahl (16 Bit) wandeln FB als Box aufrufen FC als Box aufrufen FC/SFC aufrufen ohne Parameter System FB als Box aufrufen System FC als Box aufrufen Aus Realzahl nchsthhere Ganzzahl erzeugen Ganze Zahlen vergleichen (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen vergleichen (16 Bit) Realzahlen vergleichen Ganze Zahlen dividieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen dividieren (16 Bit) Realzahlen dividieren Ganzzahl (32 Bit) in BCD-Zahl wandeln Ganzzahl (32 Bit) in Realzahl wandeln Abwrts zhlen Abwrtszhlen Strungsbit BR-Register Strungsbit berlauf Strungsbit berlauf gespeichert Strungsbit Ungltige Operation Zeit als verlngerten Impuls starten (SV) Zeit als verlngerten Impuls starten (SV) Page No. 11-3 11-2 12-3 8-22 8-21 14-2 14-7 14-4 20-4 20-4 20-2 20-4 20-4 14-17 13-3 13-2 13-5 11-9 11-8 12-6 14-8 14-9 10-7 8-13 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 9-7 8-15
Add Double Integer Add Integer Add Real Address Negative Edge Detection Address Positive Edge Detection Assign a Value BCD to Double Integer BCD to Integer Call FB from Box Call FC from Box Call FC SFC from Coil (without parameters) Call System FB from Box Call System FC from Box Ceiling Compare Double Integer (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Compare Integer (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Compare Real (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Divide Double Integer Divide Integer Divide Real Double Integer to BCD Double Integer to Real Down Counter Down Counter Coil Exception Bit BR Memory Exception Bit Overflow Exception Bit Overflow Stored Exception Bit Unordered Extended Pulse S5 Timer Extended Pulse Timer Coil
A-5
Table A-2
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with SIMATIC Equivalents, cont. International Name SIMATIC Name Aus Realzahl nchstniedere Ganzzahl erzeugen Ganzzahl (16 Bit) in BCD-Zahl wandeln 16-bit-Ganzzahl in 32-bit-Ganzzahl wandeln Verknpfungsergebnis invertieren Springen wenn 0 Springen wenn 1 Master Control Relais Anfang Master Control Relais Ende Master Control Relais ausschalten Master Control Relais einschalten Konnektor Ganze Zahlen multiplizieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen multiplizieren (16 Bit) Realzahlen multiplizieren Vorzeichen einer Realzahl wechseln Negiertes Strungsbit BR-Register Negiertes Strungsbit berlauf Negiertes Strungsbit berlauf gespeichert Negiertes Strungsbit Ungltige Operation Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei grer gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei grer als 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei kleiner gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei kleiner 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei ungleich 0 Flanke 10 abfragen ffnerkontakt Schlieerkontakt Zeit als Ausschaltverzgerung starten (SA) Zeit als Ausschaltverzgerung starten (SA) Zeit als Einschaltverzgerung starten (SE) Zeit als Einschaltverzgerung starten (SE) 1er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (32 Bit) erzeugen 1er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (16 Bit) erzeugen Page No. 14-18 14-5 14-6 8-7 18-5 18-3 20-9 20-9 20-12 20-12 8-6 11-7 11-6 12-5 14-14 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 8-20 8-4 8-3 9-13 8-18 9-9 8-16 14-11 14-10
Floor Integer to BCD Integer to Double Integer Invert Power Flow Jump-If-Not Jump Master Control Relay Activate Master Control Relay Deactivate Master Control Relay Off Master Control Relay On Midline Output Multiply Double Integer Multiply Integer Multiply Real Negate Real Number Negated Exception Bit BR Memory Negated Exception Bit Overflow Negated Exception Bit Overflow Stored Negated Exception Bit Unordered Negated Result Bit Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Greater Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Greater Than 0 Negated Result Bit Less Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Less Than 0 Negated Result Bit Not Equal 0 Negative RLO Edge Detection Normally Closed Contact (Address) Normally Open Contact (Address) Off-Delay S5 Timer Off-Delay Timer Coil On-Delay S5 Timer On-Delay Timer Coil ONEs Complement Double Integer ONEs Complement Integer
A-6
Table A-2
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with SIMATIC Equivalents, cont. International Name SIMATIC Name Datenbaustein ffnen Relaisspule, Ausgang Flanke 01 abfragen Zeit als Impuls starten (SI) Zeit als Impuls starten (SI) Ausgang rcksetzen Flipflop rcksetzen setzen Ergebnisbit bei gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei grer gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei grer als 0 Ergebnisbit bei kleiner gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei kleiner 0 Ergebnisbit bei ungleich 0 Zeit als speich. Einschaltverzgerung starten (SS) Zeit als speich. Einschaltverzgerung starten (SS) Springe zurck Divisionsrest gewinnen (32 Bit) 32 Bit linksrotieren 32 Bit rechtsrotieren Zahl runden Verknpfungsergebnis ins BR-Register laden Ausgang setzen Zhleranfangswert setzen Flipflop setzen rcksetzen 32 Bit links schieben 16 Bit links schieben Ganzzahl (32 Bit) rechtsschieben 32 Bit rechts schieben Ganzzahl (16 Bit) rechtsschieben 16 Bit rechts schieben Ganze Zahlen subtrahieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen subtrahieren (16 Bit) Realzahlen subtrahieren Ganze Zahl erzeugen Page No. 17-2 8-5 8-19 9-5 8-14 8-10 8-24 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 9-11 8-17 20-7 11-10 16-10 16-12 14-15 8-8 8-9 8-11 8-23 16-4 16-2 16-9 16-6 16-7 16-5 11-5 11-4 12-4 14-16
Open Data Block: DB or DI Output Coil Positive RLO Edge Detection Pulse S5 Timer Pulse Timer Coil Reset Coil Reset-Set Flipflop Result Bit Equal 0 Result Bit Greater Equal 0 Result Bit Greater Than 0 Result Bit Less Equal 0 Result Bit Less Than 0 Result Bit Not Equal 0 Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Return Return Fraction Double Integer Rotate Left Double Word Rotate Right Double Word Round to Double Integer Save RLO to BR Memory Set Coil Set Counter Value Set-Reset Flipflop Shift Left Double Word Shift Left Word Shift Right Double Integer Shift Right Double Word Shift Right Integer Shift Right Word Subtract Double Integer Subtract Integer Subtract Real Truncate Double Integer Part
A-7
Table A-2
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by International Name, with SIMATIC Equivalents, cont. International Name SIMATIC Name 2er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (32 Bit) erzeugen 2er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (16 Bit) erzeugen Aufwrts zhlen Aufwrtszhlen Aufwrts/abwrts zhlen 32 Bit UND verknpfen 16 Bit UND verknpfen 32 Bit Exclusiv ODER verknpfen 16 Bit Exclusiv ODER verknpfen 32 Bit ODER verknpfen 16 Bit ODER verknpfen Page No. 14-13 14-12 10-5 8-12 10-3 15-4 15-3 15-8 15-7 15-6 15-5
TWOs Complement Double Integer TWOs Complement Integer Up Counter Up Counter Coil Up-Down Counter (Word) And Double Word (Word) And Word (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word (Word) Exclusive Or Word (Word) Or Double Word (Word) Or Word
A-8
A.3
Listing with SIMATIC Names

Table A-3 provides an alphabetical listing of instructions with SIMATIC full names. Next to each full name is its international short name and a reference to the page on which the instruction is explained in this manual.
Table A-3
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with Short Names SIMATIC Name Short Name INV_I INV_DI NEG_I NEG_DI WXOR_W I_DI I_BCD SHR_I SHL_W WOR_W SHR_W WAND_W WXOR_DW DI_BCD DI_R SHR_DI ROL_DW SHL_DW WOR_DW ROR_DW SHR_DW WAND_DW S_CD (CD) S_CUD S_CU ( CU ) ( R ) ( S ) CEIL FLOOR BCD_I BCD_DI ( OPN ) Page No. 14-10 14-11 14-12 14-13 15-7 14-6 14-5 16-7 16-2 15-5 16-5 15-3 15-8 14-8 14-9 16-9 16-10 16-4 15-6 16-12 16-4 15-4 10-7 8-13 10-3 10-5 8-12 8-10 8-9 14-17 14-18 14-4 14-7 17-2
1er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (16 Bit) erzeugen 1er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (32 Bit) erzeugen 2er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (16 Bit) erzeugen 2er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (32 Bit) erzeugen 16 Bit Exclusiv ODER verknpfen 16-bit-Ganzzahl in 32-bit-Ganzzahl wandeln Ganzzahl (16 Bit) in BCD-Zahl wandeln Ganzzahl (16 Bit) rechtsschieben 16 Bit links schieben 16 Bit ODER verknpfen 16 Bit rechts schieben 16 Bit UND verknpfen 32 Bit Exclusiv ODER verknpfen Ganzzahl (32 Bit) in BCD-Zahl wandeln Ganzzahl (32 Bit) in Realzahl wandeln Ganzzahl (32 Bit) rechtsschieben 32 Bit linksrotieren 32 Bit links schieben 32 Bit ODER verknpfen 32 Bit rechtsrotieren 32 Bit rechts schieben 32 Bit UND verknpfen Abwrts zhlen Abwrtszhlen Aufwrts/abwrts zhlen Aufwrts zhlen Aufwrtszhlen Ausgang rcksetzen Ausgang setzen Aus Realzahl nchsthhere Ganzzahl erzeugen Aus Realzahl nchstniedere Ganzzahl erzeugen BCD-Zahl in Ganzzahl (16 Bit) wandeln BCD-Zahl in Ganzzahl (32 Bit) wandeln Datenbaustein ffnen
A-9
Table A-3
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with Short Names, cont. SIMATIC Name Short Name MOD ==0 | | >0 | | >=0 | | <0 | | <=0 | | <>0 | | CALL_FB CALL_FC (CALL) ( P ) ( N ) RS SR ADD_I ADD_DI DIV_I DIV_DI MUL_I MUL_DI SUB_I SUB_DI CMP_I_>= CMP_D_>= TRUNC (#) (MCRA) (MCR>) (MCR<) (MCRD) ==0 |/| >0 |/| >=0 |/| <=0 |/| <0 |/| <>0 |/| BR |/| OV |/| OS |/| UO |/| Page No. 11-10 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 20-4 20-4 20-2 8-19 8-20 8-24 8-23 11-2 11-3 11-8 11-9 11-6 11-7 11-4 11-5 13-2 13-3 14-16 8-6 20-9 20-12 20-12 20-9 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6
Divisionsrest gewinnen (32 Bit) Ergebnisbit bei gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei grer als 0 Ergebnisbit bei grer gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei kleiner 0 Ergebnisbit bei kleiner gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei ungleich 0 FB als Box aufrufen FC als Box aufrufen FC/SFC aufrufen ohne Parameter Flanke 01 abfragen Flanke 10 abfragen Flipflop rcksetzen setzen Flipflop setzen rcksetzen Ganze Zahlen addieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen addieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen dividieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen dividieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen multiplizieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen multiplizieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen subtrahieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen subtrahieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen vergleichen (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen vergleichen (32 Bit) Ganze Zahl erzeugen Konnektor Master Control Relais Anfang Master Control Relais ausschalten Master Control Relais einschalten Master Control Relais Ende Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei grer als 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei grer gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei kleiner gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei kleiner 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei ungleich 0 Negiertes Strungsbit BR-Register Negiertes Strungsbit berlauf Negiertes Strungsbit berlauf gespeichert Negiertes Strungsbit Ungltige Operation
A-10
Table A-3
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with Short Names, cont. SIMATIC Name Short Name |/| ADD_R DIV_R MUL_R SUB_R CMP_R_>= ( ) | | POS NEG (JMPN) (JMP) (RET) BR | | OV | | OS | | UO | | CALL_SFB CALL_SFC ( SAVE ) | NOT | NEG_R MOVE ROUND ( SC ) S_OFFDT ( SF ) S_ODT ( SD ) S_PULSE ( SP ) S_ODTS ( SS ) S_PEXT ( SE ) Page No. 8-4 12-3 12-6 12-5 12-4 13-5 8-5 8-3 8-21 8-22 18-5 18-3 20-7 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 20-4 20-4 8-8 8-7 14-14 14-2 14-15 8-11 9-13 8-18 9-9 8-16 9-5 8-14 9-11 8-17 9-7 8-15
ffnerkontakt Realzahlen addieren Realzahlen dividieren Realzahlen multiplizieren Realzahlen subtrahieren Realzahlen vergleichen Relaisspule, Ausgang Schlieerkontakt Signalflanke 01 abfragen Signalflanke 10 abfragen Springen wenn 0 Springen wenn 1 Springe zurck Strungsbit BR-Register Strungsbit berlauf Strungsbit berlauf gespeichert Strungsbit Ungltige Operation System FB als Box aufrufen System FC als Box aufrufen Verknpfungsergebnis ins BR-Register laden Verknpfungsergebnis invertieren Vorzeichen einer Realzahl wechseln Wert bertragen Zahl runden Zhleranfangswert setzen Zeit als Ausschaltverzgerung starten (SA) Zeit als Ausschaltverzgerung starten (SA) Zeit als Einschaltverzgerung starten (SE) Zeit als Einschaltverzgerung starten (SE) Zeit als Impuls starten (SI) Zeit als Impuls starten (SI) Zeit als speich. Einschaltverzgerung starten (SS) Zeit als speich. Einschaltverzgerung starten (SS) Zeit als verlngerten Impuls starten (SV) Zeit als verlngerten Impuls starten (SV)
A-11
A.4
Listing with SIMATIC Names and International Equivalents

Table A-4 provides an alphabetical listing of instructions with SIMATIC full names. Next to each full name is its international equivalent and a reference to the page on which the instruction is explained in this manual.
Table A-4
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with International Equivalents SIMATIC Name International Name ONEs Complement Integer ONEs Complement Double Integer TWOs Complement Integer TWOs Complement Double Integer (Word) Exclusive Or Word Integer to Double Integer Integer to BCD Shift Right Integer Shift Left Word (Word) Or Word Shift Right Word (Word) And Word (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word Double Integer to BCD Double Integer to Real Shift Right Double Integer Rotate Left Double Word Shift Left Double Word (Word) Or Double Word Rotate Right Double Word Shift Right Double Word (Word) And Double Word Down Counter Down Counter Coil Up-Down Counter Up Counter Up Counter Coil Reset Coil Set Coil Page No. 14-10 14-11 14-12 14-13 15-7 14-6 14-5 16-7 16-2 15-5 16-5 15-3 15-8 14-8 14-9 16-9 16-10 16-4 15-6 16-12 16-4 15-4 10-7 8-13 10-3 10-5 8-12 8-10 8-9
1er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (16 Bit) erzeugen 1er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (32 Bit) erzeugen 2er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (16 Bit) erzeugen 2er Komplement zu Ganzzahl (32 Bit) erzeugen 16 Bit Exclusiv ODER verknpfen 16-bit-Ganzzahl in 32-bit-Ganzzahl wandeln Ganzzahl (16 Bit) in BCD-Zahl wandeln Ganzzahl (16 Bit) rechtsschieben 16 Bit links schieben 16 Bit ODER verknpfen 16 Bit rechts schieben 16 Bit UND verknpfen 32 Bit Exclusiv ODER verknpfen Ganzzahl (32 Bit) in BCD-Zahl wandeln Ganzzahl (32 Bit) in Realzahl wandeln Ganzzahl (32 Bit) rechtsschieben 32 Bit linksrotieren 32 Bit links schieben 32 Bit ODER verknpfen 32 Bit rechtsrotieren 32 Bit rechts schieben 32 Bit UND verknpfen Abwrts zhlen Abwrtszhlen Aufwrts/abwrts zhlen Aufwrts zhlen Aufwrtszhlen Ausgang rcksetzen Ausgang setzen
A-12
Table A-4
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with International Equivalents, cont. SIMATIC Name International Name Ceiling Floor BCD to Integer BCD to Double Integer Open Data Block: DB or DI Return Fraction Double Integer Result Bit Equal 0 Result Bit Greater Than 0 Result Bit Greater Equal 0 Result Bit Less Than 0 Result Bit Less Equal 0 Result Bit Not Equal 0 Call FB from Box Call FC from Box Call FC SFC from Coil (without parameters) Positive RLO Edge Detection Negative RLO Edge Detection Reset-Set Flipflop Set-Reset Flipflop Add Integer Add Double Integer Divide Integer Divide Double Integer Multiply Integer Multiply Double Integer Subtract Integer Subtract Double Integer Compare Integer (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Compare Double Integer (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Truncate Double Integer Part Midline Output Master Control Relay Activate Master Control Relay Off Master Control Relay On Master Control Relay Deactivate Page No. 14-17 14-18 14-4 14-7 17-2 11-10 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 20-4 20-4 20-2 8-19 8-20 8-24 8-23 11-2 11-3 11-8 11-9 11-6 11-7 11-4 11-5 13-2 13-3 14-16 8-6 20-9 20-12 20-12 20-9
Aus Realzahl nchsthhere Ganzzahl erzeugen Aus Realzahl nchstniedere Ganzzahl erzeugen BCD-Zahl in Ganzzahl (16 Bit) wandeln BCD-Zahl in Ganzzahl (32 Bit) wandeln Datenbaustein ffnen Divisionsrest gewinnen (32 Bit) Ergebnisbit bei gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei grer als 0 Ergebnisbit bei grer gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei kleiner 0 Ergebnisbit bei kleiner gleich 0 Ergebnisbit bei ungleich 0 FB als Box aufrufen FC als Box aufrufen FC/SFC aufrufen ohne Parameter Flanke 01 abfragen Flanke 10 abfragen Flipflop rcksetzen setzen Flipflop setzen rcksetzen Ganze Zahlen addieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen addieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen dividieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen dividieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen multiplizieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen multiplizieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen subtrahieren (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen subtrahieren (32 Bit) Ganze Zahlen vergleichen (16 Bit) Ganze Zahlen vergleichen (32 Bit) Ganze Zahl erzeugen Konnektor Master Control Relais Anfang Master Control Relais ausschalten Master Control Relais einschalten Master Control Relais Ende
A-13
Table A-4
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with International Equivalents, cont. SIMATIC Name International Name Negated Result Bit Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Greater Than 0 Negated Result Bit Greater Eqaul 0 Negated Result Bit Less Equal 0 Negated Result Bit Less Than 0 Negated Result Bit Not Equal 0 Negated Exception Bit BR Memory Negated Exception Bit Overflow Negated Exception Bit Overflow Stored Negated Exception Bit Unordered Normally Closed Contact (Address) Add Real Divide Real Multiply Real Subtract Real Compare Real (>, <, ==, <>, <=, >=) Output Coil Normally Open Contact (Address) Address Positive Edge Detection Address Negative Edge Detection Jump-If-Not Jump Return Exception Bit BR Memory Exception Bit Overflow Exception Bit Overflow Stored Exception Bit Unordered Call System FB from Box Call System FC from Box Save RLO to BR Memory Invert Power Flow Negate Real Number Assign a Value Round to Double Integer Set Counter Value Off-Delay S5 Timer Page No. 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-4 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 8-4 12-3 12-6 12-5 12-4 13-5 8-5 8-3 8-21 8-22 18-5 18-3 20-7 19-3 19-7 19-9 19-6 20-4 20-4 8-8 8-7 14-14 14-2 14-15 8-11 9-13
Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei grer als 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei grer gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei kleiner gleich 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei kleiner 0 Negiertes Ergebnisbit bei ungleich 0 Negiertes Strungsbit BR-Register Negiertes Strungsbit berlauf Negiertes Strungsbit berlauf gespeichert Negiertes Strungsbit Ungltige Operation ffnerkontakt Realzahlen addieren Realzahlen dividieren Realzahlen multiplizieren Realzahlen subtrahieren Realzahlen vergleichen Relaisspule, Ausgang Schlieerkontakt Signalflanke 01 abfragen Signalflanke 10 abfragen Springe wenn 0 Springen wenn 1 Springe zurck Strungsbit BR-Register Strungsbit berlauf Strungsbit berlauf gespeichert Strungsbit Ungltige Operation System FB als Box aufrufen System FC als Box aufrufen Verknpfungsergebnis ins BR-Register laden Verknpfungsergebnis invertieren Vorzeichen einer Realzahl wechseln Wert bertragen Zahl runden Zhleranfangswert setzen Zeit als Ausschaltverzgerung starten (SA)
A-14
Table A-4
Ladder Logic Instructions Arranged Alphabetically by SIMATIC Name, with International Equivalents, cont. SIMATIC Name International Name Off-Delay Timer Coil On-Delay S5 Timer On-Delay Timer Coil Pulse S5 Timer Pulse Timer Coil Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Extended Pulse S5 Timer Extended Pulse Timer Coil Page No. 8-18 9-9 8-16 9-5 8-14 9-11 8-17 9-7 8-15
Zeit als Ausschaltverzgerung starten (SA) Zeit als Einschaltverzgerung starten (SE) Zeit als Einschaltverzgerung starten (SE) Zeit als Impuls starten (SI) Zeit als Impuls starten (SI) Zeit als speich. Einschaltverzgerung starten (SS) Zeit als speich. Einschaltverzgerung starten (SS) Zeit als verlngerten Impuls starten (SV) Zeit als verlngerten Impuls starten (SV)
A-15
A.5
Listing with International Short Names and SIMATIC Short Names

Table A-5 provides a list of instructions which have both international and SIMATIC short names. The table lists these instructions alphabetically according to their international full names.
Table A-5
Ladder Logic Instructions Listed in This Manual with International Short Names and SIMATIC Short Names International Short Name S_CD ( CD ) BR | | S_PEXT ( SE ) S_OFFDT ( SF ) S_ODT ( SD ) ( OPN ) S_PULSE ( SP ) S_ODTS ( SS ) ( SC ) S_CU ( CU ) S_CUD SIMATIC Short Name Z_RUECK ( ZR ) BIE | | S_VIMP ( SV ) S_AVERZ ( SA ) S_EVERZ ( SE ) ( AUF ) S_IMPULS ( SI ) S_SEVERZ ( SS ) ( SZ ) Z_VORW ( ZV ) ZAEHLER Page No. 10-7 8-13 19-3 9-7 8-15 9-13 8-18 9-9 8-16 17-2 9-5 8-14 9-11 8-17 8-11 10-5 8-12 10-3
International Name Down Counter Down Counter Coil Exception Bit BR Memory Extended Pulse S5 Timer Extended Pulse Timer Coil Off-Delay S5 Timer Off-Delay Timer Coil On-Delay S5 Timer On-Delay Timer Coil Open Data Block: DB or DI Pulse S5 Timer Pulse Timer Coil Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil Set Counter Value Up Counter Up Counter Coil Up-Down Counter
A-16
Programming Examples
Chapter Overview
Section B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 Overview Bit Logic Instructions Timer Instructions Counter and Comparison Instructions Integer Math Instructions Word Logic Instructions Description
B
Page B-2 B-3 B-7 B-11 B-13 B-14
B-1
B.1
Overview
Practical Applications
Each ladder logic instruction described in this manual triggers a specific operation. When you combine these instructions into a program, you can accomplish a wide variety of automation tasks. This chapter provides the following examples of practical applications of the ladder logic instructions:
S Controlling a conveyor belt using bit logic instructions S Detecting direction of movement on a conveyor belt using bit logic
instructions
S Generating a clock pulse using timer instructions S Keeping track of storage space using counter and comparison instructions S Solving a problem using integer math instructions S Setting the length of time for heating an oven
Instructions Used The examples in this chapter use the following instructions:
S Add Integer (ADD_I) S Assign a Value (MOVE) S Compare Integer (CMP_I>=) S Compare Integer (CMP_I<=) S Divide Integer (DIV_I) S Down Counter Coil ( CD ) S Extended Pulse Timer Coil ( SE ) S Jump-If-Not ( JMPN ) S Multiply Integer (MUL_I) S Normally Closed Contact | / | S Normally Open Contact | | S Output Coil ( ) S Positive RLO Edge Detection ( P ) S Reset Coil ( R ) S Return ( RET ) S Set Coil ( S ) S Up Counter Coil ( CU ) S (Word) And Word (WAND_W) S (Word) Or Word (WOR_W)
B-2
B.2
Controlling a Conveyor Belt
Figure B-1 shows a conveyor belt that can be activated electrically. There are two push button switches at the beginning of the belt: S1 for START and S2 for STOP. There are also two push button switches at the end of the belt: S3 for START and S4 for STOP. It it possible to start or stop the belt from either end. Also, sensor S5 stops the belt when an item on the belt reaches the end.
Symbolic Programming
You can write a program to control the conveyor belt shown in Figure B-1 using symbols that represent the various components of the conveyor system. If you choose this method, you need to make a symbol table to correlate the symbols you choose with absolute values (see Table B-1). You define the symbols in the symbol table (see /231/ User Manual).
Table B-1 Elements of Symbolic Programming for Conveyor Belt System Absolute Address I 1.1 I 1.2 I 1.3 I 1.4 I 1.5 Q 4.0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 MOTOR_ON Symbol Symbol Table I 1.1 I 1.2 I 1.3 I 1.4 I 1.5 Q 4.0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 MOTOR_ON
System Component Push Button Start Switch Push Button Stop Switch Push Button Start Switch Push Button Stop Switch Sensor Motor
Sensor S5
MOTOR_ON Figure B-1 Conveyor Belt System
S1 S2
` Start ` Stop
S3 S4
` Start ` Stop
B-3
Absolute Programming
You can write a program to control the conveyor belt shown in Figure B-1 using absolute values that represent the different components of the conveyor system (see Table B-2). Figure B-2 shows a ladder logic program to control the conveyor belt.
Table B-2 Elements of Absolute Programming for Conveyor Belt System System Component Push Button Start Switch Push Button Stop Switch Push Button Start Switch Push Button Stop Switch Sensor Motor Absolute Address I 1.1 I 1.2 I 1.3 I 1.4 I 1.5 Q 4.0
Network 1: Pressing either start switch turns the motor on. Push Button Start Switch S1 I 1.1 Push Button Start Switch S3 I 1.3 Motor MOTOR_ON Q 4.0 S
Network 2: Pressing either stop switch or opening the normally closed contact at the end of the belt turns the motor off. Push Button Stop Switch S2 I 1.2 Push Button Stop Switch S4 I 1.4 Motor MOTOR_ON Q 4.0 R
Sensor S5 I 1.5
Figure B-2
Ladder Logic for Controlling a Conveyor Belt
B-4
Detecting the Direction of a Conveyor Belt
Figure B-3 shows a conveyor belt that is equipped with two photoelectric barriers (PEB1 and PEB2) that are designed to detect the direction in which a package is moving on the belt. Each photoelectric light barrier functions like a normally open contact (see Section 8.2).
Symbolic Programming
You can write a program to activate a direction display for the conveyor belt system shown in Figure B-3 using symbols that represent the various components of the conveyor system, including the photoelectric barriers that detect direction. If you choose this method, you need to make a symbol table to correlate the symbols you choose with absolute values (see Table B-3). You define the symbols in the symbol table (see the User Manual /231/).
Table B-3 Elements of Symbolic Programming for Detecting Direction Absolute Address I 0.0 I 0.1 Q 4.0 Q 4.1 M 0.0 M 0.1 Symbol PEB1 PEB2 RIGHT LEFT PMB1 PMB2 Symbol Table I 0.0 I 0.1 Q 4.0 Q 4.1 M 0.0 M 0.1 PEB1 PEB2 RIGHT LEFT PMB1 PMB2
System Component Photo electric barrier 1 Photo electric barrier 2 Display for movement to right Display for movement to left Pulse memory bit 1 Pulse memory bit 2
Absolute Programming
You can write a program to activate the direction display for the conveyor belt shown in Figure B-3 using absolute values that represent the photoelectric barriers that detect direction (see Table B-4). Figure B-4 shows a ladder logic program to control the direction display for the conveyor belt.
Q 4.0
PEB2
PEB1
Q 4.1
Figure B-3
Conveyor Belt System with Photoelectric Light Barriers for Detecting Direction
B-5
Table B-4
Elements of Absolute Programming for Detecting Direction System Component Absolute Address I 0.0 I 0.1 Q 4.0 Q 4.1 M 0.0 M 0.1
Photo electric barrier 1 Photo electric barrier 2 Display for movement to right Display for movement to left Pulse memory bit 1 Pulse memory bit 2
Network 1: If there is a transition in signal state from 0 to 1 (positive edge) at input I 0.0 and, at the same time, the signal state at input I 0.1 is 0, then the package on the belt is moving to the left. Photoelectric barrier 1 PEB1 I 0.0 Pulse memory bit 1 PMB1 M 0.0 P Photoelectric barrier 2 PEB2 I 0.1 Display for movement to left LEFT Q 4.1 S
Network 2: If there is a transition in signal state from 0 to 1 (positive edge) at input I 0.1 and, at the same time, the signal state at input I 0.0 is 0, then the package on the belt is moving to the right. If one of the photoelectric light barriers is broken, this means that there is a package between the barriers. Photoelectric barrier 2 PEB2 I 0.1 Pulse memory bit 2 Photoelectric barrier 1 PMB2 PEB1 M 0.1 I 0.0 P Display for movement to right RIGHT Q 4.0 S
Network 3: If neither photoelectric barrier is broken, then there is no package between the barriers. The direction pointer shuts off. Photoelectric barrier 1 PEB1 I 0.0 Photoelectric barrier 2 PEB2 I 0.1 Display for movement to right RIGHT Q 4.0 R Display for movement to left LEFT Q 4.1 R
Figure B-4
Ladder Logic for Detecting the Direction of a Conveyor Belt
B-6
B.3
Timer Instructions
Clock Pulse Generator
You can use a clock pulse generator or flasher relay when you need to produce a signal that repeats periodically. A clock pulse generator is common in a signalling system that controls the flashing of indicator lamps. When you use the S7-300, you can implement the clock pulse generator function by using time-driven processing in special organization blocks. The example shown in the following ladder logic program, however, illustrates the use of timer functions to generate a clock pulse. The sample program in Figure B-5 shows how to implement a freewheeling clock pulse generator by using a timer (pulse duty factor 1:1). The frequency is divided into the values listed in Table B-5.
B-7
Network 1: If the signal state of timer T 1 is 0, load the time value 250 ms into T 1 and start T 1 as an extended-pulse timer. M0.2 T1 SE S5T#250MS Network 2: The state of the timer is saved temporarily in an auxiliary memory marker. M0.2
T1
Network 3: If the signal state of timer T is 1, jump to jump label N001. M0.2 N001 JMP
Network 4: When the timer T1 expires, the memory word 100 is incremented by 1.
ADD_I EN ENO MW100 1 IN1 IN2 OUT MW100
Network 5: The MOVE instruction allows you to output the different clock frequencies at outputs Q12.0 through Q 13.7. M001 MOVE EN ENO MW100 IN OUT AW12
Figure B-5 Ladder Logic to Generate a Clock Pulse
B-8
A signal check of timer T 1 produces the result of logic operation (RLO, see Section 6.2) shown in Figure B-6.
1 0 250 ms Figure B-6 RLO for Negated T 1 Contact in the Clock Pulse Timer Example
As soon as the time runs out, the timer is restarted. Because of this, the signal check made by | / | T 1 produces a signal state of 1 only briefly. Figure B-7 shows what the negated (inverted) RLO bit looks like.
1 0 250 ms Figure B-7 Negated RLO Bit of Timer T 1 in the Clock Pulse Timer Example
Every 250 ms the RLO bit is 0. The jump is ignored and the contents of memory word MW100 is incremented by 1.
Achieving a Specific Frequency
Table B-5 lists the frequencies that you can achieve from the individual bits of memory bytes MB101 and MB100. Network 5 in the ladder logic diagram shown in Figure B-5 illustrates how the MOVE instruction allows you to see the different clock frequencies on outputs Q12.0 through Q13.7.
Table B-5 Frequencies for Clock Pulse Timer Example Frequency in Hz 2.0 1.0 0.5 0.25 0.125 0.0625 0.03125 0.015625 0.0078125 0.0039062 0.0019531 Duration 0.5 s (250 ms on/250 ms off) 1 s (0.5 s on/0.5 s off) 2 s (1 s on/1 s off 4 s (2 s on/2 s off) 8 s (4 s on/4 s off) 16 s (8 s on/8 s off) 32 s (16 s on/16 s off) 64 s (32 s on/32 s off) 128 s (64 s on/64 s off) 256 s (128 s on/128 s off) 512 s (256 s on/256 s off)
Bits of MB101/MB100 M 101.0 M 101.1 M 101.2 M 101.3 M 101.4 M 101.5 M 101.6 M 101.7 M 100.0 M 100.1 M 100.2
B-9
Table B-5
Frequencies for Clock Pulse Timer Example Frequency in Hz 0.0009765 0.0004882 0.0002441 0.000122 0.000061 Duration 1024 s (512 s on/512 s off) 2048 s (1024 s on/1024 s off) 4096 s (2048 s on/2048 s off) 8192 s (4096 s on/4096 s off) 16384 s (8192 s on/8192 s off)
Bits of MB101/MB100 M 100.3 M 100.4 M 100.5 M 100.6 M 100.7
Table B-6 lists the signal states of the bits of memory byte MB101. Figure B-8 shows the signal state of memory bit M101.1.
Table B-6 Scan Cycle 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal States of the Bits of Memory Byte MB101 Signal State of Bits of Memory Byte MB101 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Time Value in ms 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
T M 101.1 1 0 Time 0 250 ms 0.5 s 0.75 s 1 s 1.25 s 1.5 s
Frequency + 1 + 1 + 1Hz 1 s T Figure B-8 Signal State of Bit 1 of MB101 (M 101.1)
B-10
B.4
Counter and Comparison Instructions
Storage Area with Counter and Comparator
Figure B-9 shows a system with two conveyor belts and a temporary storage area in between them. Conveyor belt 1 delivers packages to the storage area. A photoelectric barrier at the end of conveyor belt 1 near the storage area determines how many packages are delivered to the storage area. Conveyor belt 2 transports packages from the temporary storage area to a loading dock where trucks take the packages away for delivery to customers. A photoelectric barrier at the end of conveyor belt 2 near the storage area determines how many packages leave the storage area to go to the loading dock. A display panel with five lamps indicates the fill level of the temporary storage area. Figure B-10 show the ladder logic program that activates the indicator lamps on the display panel.
Display Panel
Storage area empty (Q 12.0)
Storage area not empty (Q 12.1)
Storage area 50% full (Q 15.2)
Storage area 90% full (Q 15.3)
Storage area filled to capacity (Q 15.4)
I 0.0 Packages in
Temporary storage for 100 packages
I 0.1 Packages out
Conveyor belt 1 Photoelectric barrier 1
Conveyor belt 2 Photoelectric barrier 2
Figure B-9
Storage Area with Counter and Comparator
B-11
Network 1: Counter C1 counts up at each signal change from 0 to 1 at input CU and counts down at each signal change from 0 to 1 at input CD. With a signal change from 0 to 1 at input S, the counter value is set to the value PV. A signal change from 0 to 1 at input R resets the counter value to 0. MW200 contains the current counter value of C1. Q12.1 indicates storage area not empty. C1 S_CUD Q12.1 I12.0 CU Q I12.1 CD I12.2 S C#10 I12.3 R CV_BCD MW200 PV CV MW210
Network 2: Q12.0 indicates storage area empty. Q12.1 Q12.0
Network 3: If 50 is less than or equal to the counter value (in other words if the current counter value is greater than or equal to 50), the indicator lamp for storage area 50% full is lit. CMP <= I 50 MW200 IN1 IN2 Q15.2
Network 4: If the counter value is greater than or equal to 90, the indicator lamp for storage area 90% full is lit. CMP >= I MW200 90 IN1 IN2 Q15.3
Network 5: If the counter value is greater than or equal to 100, the indicator lamp for storage area full is lit. Use output Q4.4 to interlock conveyor belt 1. CMP >= I MW200 100 IN1 IN2 Q15.4
Figure B-10 Ladder Logic for Activating Indicator Lamps on a Display Panel
B-12
B.5
Solving a Math Problem
The sample program in Figure B-11 shows you how to use three integer math instructions to produce the same result as the following equation:
MD4 +
(IW0 ) DBW3) MW0
15
Network 1:
Open Data Block DB1 DB1 OPN
Network 2: Input word IW0 is added to shared data word DBW3 (data block must be defined and opened) and the sum is loaded into memory word MW100. MW100 is then multiplied by 15 and the answer stored in memory word MW102. MW102 is divided by MW0 with the result stored in MW4. As long as all results are in the permissible range of each instruction, the ENO passes a signal state of 1 to the next box.
ADD_I EN ENO IW0 DBW3 IN1 IN2 OUT MW100 MW100 15
MUL_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT MW102 MW102 MW0
DIV_I EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT MD4
Figure B-11
Ladder Logic for Integer Math Instructions
B-13
B.6
Heating an Oven
The operator of the oven shown in Figure B-12 starts the oven heating by pushing the start push button. The operator can set the length of time for heating by using the thumbwheel switches shown in the figure. The value that the operator sets indicates seconds in binary coded decimal (BCD) format. Table B-7 lists the components of the heating system and their corresponding absolute addresses used in the sample program shown in Figure B-13.
Table B-7 Heating System Components and Corresponding Absolute Addresses System Component Start push button Thumbwheel for ones Thumbwheel for tens Thumbwheel for hundreds Heating starts Absolute Address in STL Program I 0.7 I 1.0 to I 1.3 I 1.4 to I 1.7 I 0.0 to I 0.3 Q 4.0
Oven

4 4 7.... XXXX IB0 Start push button I 0.7 ...0 0001 7... 1001 IB1
Thumbwheels for setting BCD digits
4 ...0 Bits IW0 Bytes
Heat Q 4.0
0001
Figure B-12
Using the Inputs and Outputs for a Time-Limited Heating Process
B-14
Network 1: If the timer is running, then turn on the heater. If the timer is running, the Return instruction ends the processing here. T1 Heating starts Q 4.0
Network 2: T1
If the timer is running, the Return instruction ends the processing here.
RET
Network 3: Mask input bits I 0.4 through I 0.7 (that is, reset them to 0). These bits of the thumbwheel inputs are not used. The 16 bits of the thumbwheel inputs are combined with W#16#0FFF according to the (Word) And Word instruction. The result is loaded into memory word MW1. In order to set the time base of seconds, the preset value is combined with W#16#2000 according to the (Word) Or Word instruction, setting bit 13 to 1 and resetting bit 12 to 0.
WAND_W EN ENO IW0 W#16#FFF IN1 IN2 OUT MW1 MW1 W#16#2000
WOR_W EN ENO IN1 IN2 OUT MW2
Network 4: Start timer T 1 as an extended pulse timer if the start push button is pressed, loading as a preset value memory word MW2 (derived from the logic above). Start I 0.7 T1 SE MW2
Figure B-13
Ladder Logic for Heating an Oven
B-15
B-16
Number Notation
Chapter Overview
Section C.1 Number Notation Description
C
Page C-2
C-1
Number Notation
C.1
Number Notation
General Information
Ladder logic instructions work with data objects of specific sizes (see Table C-2). For example, the Bit Logic instructions perform their operations on binary digits (bits); the Move instructions perform their operations on bytes, words, and double words. Math instructions also perform their operations on bytes, words, and double words. In these byte, word, and double word addresses, you can code various number formats such as integer and real. If you use symbolic addressing, you define symbols and indicate a data type for each of these symbols (see Table C-2). Different data types have different format options and number notation. The information in the following sections will help you understand formats and number notation. This chapter of the manual describes only some of the possible number and constant notations.
Table C-1 Format Hexadecimal Binary IEC date IEC time Time of day Character Number and Constant Formats Not Covered in this Chapter Size in Bits 8, 16, and 32 8, 16, and 32 16 32 32 8 Number Notation B#16#, W#16#, and DW#16# 2# D# T# TOD# A
Bits, Bytes, Words, and Double Words
A bit is a binary digit (0 or 1), a byte is 8 bits, a word is 16 bits, and a double word is 32 bits.
Data Types
Every input and output parameter of a LAD box can have one of the following types:
S Elementary types (see Table C-2) S Structured types (Array, Struct, String, Date_and_Time) S Timer, counter and block types S Pointer und array
More detailed information on data structures and arrays which you can define yourself, and on data types with a different structure, such as STRING and DATE_AND_TIME, is available in the Programming Manual /120/ and User Manual /231/.
C-2
Number Notation
Table C-2
Constant Formats for Elementary Data Types Format Options Range and Number Notation (Lowest Value to Highest Value) TRUE/FALSE B#16#0 to B#16#FF 2#0 to 2#1111_1111_1111_1111 W#16#0 to W#16#FFFF C#0 to C#999 B#(0,0) to B#(255,255) 2#0 to 2#1111_1111_1111_1111_ 1111_1111_1111_1111 DW#16#0000_0000 to DW#16#FFFF_FFFF B#(0,0,0,0) to B#(255,255,255,255) -32768 to 32767 L#-2147483648 to L#2147483647 Example
Size Type and Description in Bits BOOL (Bit) BYTE (Byte) WORD (Word) 1 8 16
Boolean text Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal BCD Unsigned decimal
TRUE B#16#10 byte#16#10 2#0001_0000_0000_0000 W#16#1000 word16#1000 C#998 B#(10,20) byte#(10,20) 2#1000_0001_0001_1000_ 1011_1011_0111_1111 DW#16#00A2_1234 dword#16#00A2_1234 B#(1,14,100,120) byte#(1,14,100,120) 1 L#1
DWORD (Double word)
32
Binary
Hexadecimal Unsigned decimal
INT (Integer) DINT (Double integer) REAL (Floating point) S5TIME (SIMATIC time) TIME (IEC time) DATE (IEC date) TIME_OF_ DAY (Time of day) CHAR (Character)
16 32
Signed decimal Signed decimal
32
IEEE floating point S5 Time in 10-ms units (as default value) IEC time in 1-ms units, signed integer IEC date in 1-day units Time of day in 1-ms units
Upper limit: 3.402823e+38 1.234567e+13 Lower limit: 1.175 495e-38 (see also Table C-5) S5T#0H_0M_0S_10MS to S5T#2H_46M_30S_0MS and S5T#0H_0M_0S_0MS T#-24D_20H_31M_23S_648MS to T#24D_20H_31M_23S_647MS D#1990-1-1 to D#2168-12-31 TOD#0:0:0.0 to TOD#23:59:59.999 S5T#0H_1M_0S_0MS S5TIME#0H_1M_0S_0MS T#0D_1H_1M_0S_0MS TIME#0D_1H_1M_0S_0MS D#1994-3-15 DATE#1994-3-15 TOD#1:10:3.3 TIME_OF_DAY#1:10:3.3
16
32
16 32
Character
A,B, and so on
Integers: 16 Bits
An integer is a whole number that has a sign to indicate whether it is positive or negative. In memory, a 16-bit integer takes up one word of space. Table C-3 shows the range of a 16-bit integer. Figure C-1 shows the integer + 44 in binary format.
C-3
Number Notation
Table C-3
Integer Range Format 16-bit integer Range -32,768 to +32,767
Bits 15 0 0 Sign Figure C-1
12 11 0 0 0
8 0
7 0
4 0 +
3 1
0 0
Decimal Values: 32
8 + 4 = 44
A 16-Bit Integer in Binary Format: +44
Double Integers: 32 Bits
An integer is a whole number that has a sign to indicate whether it is positive or negative. In memory, a 32-bit integer (double integer) takes up two words of space. Table C-4 shows the range of a double integer. Figure C-2 shows the integer - 500,000 in binary format. In binary format, the negative form of an integer is represented as the twos complement of the positive form of that integer. You obtain the twos complement of an integer by inverting the signal states of all bits and then adding + 1 to the result.
Table C-4 Double Integer Range Format 32-bit integer Range -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Bits 31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 8 7 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Sign Figure C-2 A 32-Bit Integer in Binary Format: -500,000
3 0 0 0 0 0
Real Numbers
A real number (also called floating-point number) is a positive or negative number that includes a decimal value, for example, 0.339 or - 11.1. You can also include an exponent with a real number to indicate the integer power of 10 by which the real number is multiplied to obtain the value you want to represent. For example, you can represent 1,234,000 as 1.234E6 or 1.234e6 (that is, 1.234 106). Table C-5 shows the range of a real number. In memory, a real number takes up two words of space (32 bits, see Figure C-3). The most significant bit indicates the sign of the number (bit 31, where 0 indicates plus, 1 indicates minus). The other bits represent the exponent and the mantissa.
C-4
Number Notation
Table C-5
Real Number Ranges Format Real numbers Range1 -3.402823E+38 to -1.175495E-38 and " 0 and +1.175495E-38 to +3.402823E+38
If the result of a floating-point operation falls into the ranges of -1.175495E-38 to -1.401298E-45 or +1.401298E-45 to +1.175495E-38, then an underflow is generated (see Table 12-6). This is the range of denormalized numbers.
Format for Real Numbers
Real numbers (also called floating-point numbers) in ladder logic conform to the basic format, single width, described in ANSI/IEEE Std 754-1985, IEEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic. In this format, you can represent only those values that are specified by the following three integer parameters:
S p = the number of significant bits (precision) S Emax = the maximum exponent S Emin = the minimum exponent
Table C-6 shows the format parameters.
Table C-6 Format Parameters for Real Numbers Parameter Name p Emax Emin Exponent bias Exponent width in bits Format width in bits Parameter Value 24 +127 -126 +127 8 32
The format includes the following entities:
S Numbers of the form (-1)s 2E (b0 . b1 b2...bp-1), where

s = 0 or 1 E = any integer between Emin and Emax, inclusive bi = 0 or 1
S Two infinities, +R and -R S At least one signaling NaN (NaN means not a floating-point number) S At least one quiet NaN (NaN means not a floating-point number)
C-5
Number Notation
Component Fields of a Real Number
Real numbers (also called floating-point numbers) of the basic format, single width, are composed of the following fields (see Figure C-3):
S A one-bit sign: s S A biased exponent: e = E + bias S A fraction: f = . b1 b2...bp-1

The range of the unbiased exponent E is every integer between Emin and Emax (that is, -126 to +127), inclusive, and two other reserved values Emin-1 to encode "0 and denormalized numbers, and Emax + 1 to encode "R and NaNs. Figure C-3 shows the three fields (s, e, and f) of a 32-bit floating-point number. In the figure, a 32-bit floating-point number X has a value v that you derive from the fields in the following manner:
S If e = 255 and if f 00, then v is NaN regardless of s. S If e = 255 and if f = 0, then v = (-1)s R. S If 0 < e < 255, then v = (-1)s 2e-127 (1 . f).
(In this case, you are dealing with a normalized number.)
S If e = 0 and f 00, then v = (-1)s 2e-126 (0 . f).

(In this case, you are dealing with a denormalized number.)
S If e = 0 and f = 0, then v = (-1)s 0 (zero).

Bits 31 s
28 27 e
24 23
20 19
16 15
12 11 f
8 7
4 3
Sign of Mantissa: s (1 bit) Figure C-3
Exponent: e (8 bits)
Mantissa or fraction: f (23 bits)
Format of a Real Number
C-6
Number Notation
Examples of Real Number Format
Figure C-4 shows the real number format for the following decimal values:
S 10.0 S p (3.141593) S Square root of 2 (p2 = 1.414214)

The hexadecimal value for the real number is shown in the row above the bit numbers.
Decimal value 10.0 Hexadecimal 4 value Bits 31 28 27 1 24 23 2 20 19 0 16 15 0 12 11 0 8 7 0 4 3 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign of Mantissa: s (1 bit) Exponent: e (8 bits) e = 27 + 21 = 130 1.f 2e-bias = 1.25 23 = 10.0 [1.25 2(130-127) = 1.25 23 = 10.0] Mantissa or fraction: f (23 bits) f = 2-2 = 0.25
Decimal value 3.141593 Hexadecimal 4 0 value Bits 31 28 27 24 23
4 20 19
9 16 15
0 12 11
F 8 7
D 4 3
C 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
Sign of Mantissa: s (1 bit)
Decimal value 1.414214 Hexadecimal 3 value Bits 31 28 27 F 24 23 B 20 19 5 16 15 0 12 11 4 8 7 F 4 3 7 0
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Sign of Mantissa: s (1 bit) Figure C-4
Example of a Floating-Point Number Format for Decimal Value 10.0
C-7
Number Notation
Binary Coded Decimal Numbers
The binary coded decimal (BCD) format represents a decimal number by using groups of binary digits (bits). One group of 4 bits represents one digit of a signed decimal number or the sign of the decimal number. The groups of 4 bits are combined to form a word (16 bits) or double word (32 bits). The four most significant bits indicate the sign of the number (1111 indicates minus and 0000 indicates plus). Commands with BCD-coded addresses only evaluate the highest-value bit (15 in word, 31 in double word format). Table C-7 shows the format and range for the two types of BCD numbers. Figure C-5 and Figure C-6 provide an example of a binary coded decimal number in word format and double word format, respectively.
Table C-7 Binary Coded Decimal Numbers with 16 and 32 Bits Format Word (16 bits, three-digit BCD number with sign) Double word (32 bits, seven-digit BCD number with sign) Range -999 to +999 -9,999,999 to +9,999,999
+310 (Decimal format) Bits 15 0 0 Sign Figure C-5 12 11 8 0 0 0 1 1 Hundreds (102) 7 0 4 1 3 0 0 0
0 0 Tens (101)
0 0 Ones (100)
Binary Coded Decimal Number in Word Format
-9,999,999 Bits 31 28 27 24 23 20 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Millions Hundreds of Sign (106) Thousands (105) Figure C-6
(Decimal format) 3 0 1 0 0 1 Ones (100)
19 16 15 12 11 8 7 4 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Tens of Thousands Hundreds Tens Thousands (103) (102) (101) (104)
Binary Coded Decimal Number in Double Word Format
C-8
Number Notation
Entering Duration of Time
When you enter time duration using the S5TIME data type, your entries are stored in binary coded decimal format (BCD, see Figure C-7 and Table C-8). When working with S5TIME, you enter a time value in the range of 0 to 999 and you indicate a time base (see Table C-8). The time base indicates the interval at which a timer decrements the time value by one unit until it reaches 0.
15... x x 1 0 0 0 1 Time base 1 second 0
...8 1
7... 0 0 2 1 0 0 1 7 1
...0 1
Time value in BCD (0 to 999)
Irrelevant: These bits are ignored when the timer is started. Figure C-7 Contents of Timer Address: Timer Value 127, Time Base 1 Second
Table C-8
Time Base for S5TIME Time Base 10 ms 100 ms 1s 10 s Binary Code for the Time Base 00 01 10 11
You can pre-load a time value using either of the following syntax formats:
S W#16#wxyz
Where w = the time base (that is, the time interval or resolution) Where xyz = the time value in binary coded decimal format
S S5T# aH_bbM_ccS_ddMS
Where a = hours, bb = minutes, cc = seconds, and dd = milliseconds The time base is selected automatically and the value is rounded to the next lower number with that time base. The maximum time value that you can enter is 9,990 seconds, or 2H_46M_30S.
Entering Date and Time
When you enter date and time using the DATE_AND_TIME data type, your entries are stored in binary coded decimal format (see Table C-9). The DATE_AND_TIME data type has the following range: DT#1990-1-1-0:0:0.0 to DT#2089-12-31-23:59:59.999
C-9
Number Notation
The following examples show the syntax for the date and time for Thursday, December 25, 1993, at 8:01 and 1.23 seconds in the morning. The following two formats are possible:
S DATE_AND_TIME#1993-12-25-8:01:1.23 S DT#1993-12-25-8:01:1.23
The following special IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) standard functions are available for working with the DATE_AND_TIME data type (for more information, see the Programming Manual /234/:
S Convert date and time of day to the DATE_AND_TIME (DT) format

FC3: D_TOD_DT
S Extract the date from the DATE_AND_TIME format

FC6: DT_DATE
S Extract the day of the week from the DATE_AND_TIME format

FC7: DT_DAY
S Extract the time of day from the DATE_AND_TIME format

FC8: DT_TOD Table C-9 shows the contents of the bytes that contain the date and time information for Thursday, December 25, 1993, at 8:01 and 1.23 seconds in the morning.
Table C-9 Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (4MSB) 7 (4LSB) Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Two most significant digits of MSEC Least significant digit of MSEC Day of week 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday ... 7 = Saturday Contents of the Date and Time Bytes Contents Example B#16#93 B#16#12 B#16#25 B#16#08 B#16#01 B#16#01 B#16#23 B#16#6 B#16#5
C-10
References
/30/ /70/ /71/ /72/ Primer: S7-300 Programmable Controller, Quick Start Manual: S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation
D
Reference Manual: S7-300, M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Instruction List: S7-300 Programmable Controller
/100/ Manual: S7-400/M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation /101/ Reference Manual: S7-400/M7-400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications /102/ Instruction List: S7-400 Programmable Controller /231/ User Manual: Standard Software for S7 and M7, STEP 7 /232/ Manual: Statement List (STL) for S7-300 and S7-400 Programming /234/ Programming Manual: System Software for S7-300 and S7-400 Program Design /235/ Reference Manual: System Software for S7-300 and S7-400 System and Standard Functions /236/ Manual: FBD for S7-300 and 400, Programming /237/ Master Index, STEP 7 /250/ Manual: Structured Control Language (SCL) for S7-300/S7-400, Programming /251/ Manual: GRAPH for S7-300 and S7-400, Programming Sequential Control Systems /252/ Manual: HiGraph for S7-300 and S7-400, Programming State Graphs /253/ Manual: C Programming for S7-300 and S7-400, Writing C Programs /254/ Manual: Continuous Function Charts (CFC) for S7 and M7, Programming Continuous Function Charts
D-1
References
/270/ Manual: S7-PDIAG for S7-300 and S7-400 Configuring Process Diagnostics for LAD, STL, and FBD /271/ Manual: NETPRO, Configuring Networks /800/ DOCPRO Creating Wiring Diagrams (CD only) /801/ TeleService for S7, C7 and M7 Remote Maintenance for Automation Systems (CD only) /802/ PLC Simulation for S7-300 and S7-400 (CD only) /803/ Reference Manual: Standard Software for S7-300 and S7-400, STEP 7 Standard Functions, Part 2
D-2
Glossary
A
Absolute Addressing Absolute addressing specifies the location of the address which is currently being processed.
Accumulator
Accumulators are registers in the CPU which act as intermediate buffers for load, transfer, comparison, math, and conversion operations.
Actual Parameter
Actual parameters replace the formal parameters when function blocks (FB) and functions (FC) are called. Example: The formal parameter Start is replaced by the actual parameter I 3.6.
Address
An address is part of a STEP 7 statement instruction which determines the medium the processor should use to do something. It can be addressed with either an absolute or a symbolic name.
Address Identifier
An address identifier is the part of the address which contains various data. The data can include elements such as a value itself (data object) or the size of a value with which the instruction can, for example, perform a logic operation. In the instruction statement L IB10 IB is the address identifier (I indicates the memory input area and B indicates a byte in that area).
Address Register
The address register is part of the registers in the communication part of the CPU. They act as pointers for register indirect addressing (possible in STL).
Array
An array is a complex data type which consists of data elements of the same type. These elements can be elementary or complex.
Glossary-1
Glossary
B
Bit Result (BR) The bit result is the link between bit and word-oriented processing. This is an efficient method to allow the binary interpretation of the result of a word instruction and to include it in a series of logic operations.
C
Call Hierarchy All blocks must be called first before they can be processed. The sequence and nesting of these calls within an organized block is called the call hierarchy.
Chart
Specific graphic source file created with the programming language CFC (Continuous Function Chart).
Condition Codes CC 1 and CC 0
The CC 1 and CC 0 bits (condition codes) provide information on the following results or bits:
S Result of a math operation S Result of a comparison S Result of a digital operation S Bits that have been shifted out by a shift or rotate command
Container Folder of the user interface of the SIMATIC Manager which can be opened and can hold other folders and objects.
CPU
A CPU (central processing unit) is the central module in a programmable controller in which the user program is stored and processed. It consists of an operating system, processing unit, and communication interfaces.
Current Path
Characteristics of the Ladder Logic representation type. Current paths contain contacts and coils. Complex elements (e.g. math functions) can also be inserted into current paths in the form of boxes. Current paths are connected to power rails.
Glossary-2
Glossary
D
Data Block (DB) Data blocks are areas in a user program which store user data. There are shared data blocks which can be accessed by all logic blocks and there are instance data blocks which are associated with a certain function block (FB) calls. In contrast to all other blocks, data blocks do not contain instructions.
Data, Static
Static data are local data of a function block which are stored in the instance data block and, therefore, remain intact until the function block is processed again.
Data Type
A data type defines how the value of a variable or a constant should be used in the user program. In SIMATIC STEP 7 two data types are available to the user (IEC 11313):
S Elementary data types S Complex data types

Data Type, Complex Complex data types are created by the user with the data type declaration. They do not have their own name and cannot, therefore, be used again. They can either be arrays or structures. The data types STRING and DATE AND TIME are classed as complex data types.
Data Type, Elementary
Elementary data types are preset data types according to IEC 11313. Examples:
S BOOL defines a binary variable (Bit) S Data type INT defines a 16-bit fixed-point variable.
Declaration
The declaration section is used for the declaration of the local data of a logic block when programming in the Text Editor.
Direct Addressing
In direct addressing the address contains the memory location of a value which is to be used by the instruction. Example: The location Q4.0 defines bit 0 in byte 4 of the process-image output table.
Glossary-3
Glossary
F
First Check Bit First check of the result of logic operation.
Folder
A folder on the user interface of the SIMATIC Manager that can be opened and that can contain other folders and objects.
Formal Parameter
A formal parameter is a stand-in for the actual parameter in logic blocks. In function blocks (FBs) and functions (FCs) the formal parameters are declared by the user, in system function blocks (SFBs) and system functions (SFCs) they are already available. When a block is called, formal parameters are assigned actual parameters; the block works with the actual parameters. The formal parameters are classed as local data. They can be input, output, or in/out parameters.
Function (FC)
According to the International Electrotechnical Commissions IEC 11313 standard, functions are logic blocks that do not reference an instance data block, meaning they do not have a memory. A function allows you to pass parameters in the user program, which means they are suitable for programming frequently recurring, complex functions, such as calculations.
Function Block (FB)
According to the International Electrotechnical Commissions IEC 11313 standard, function blocks are logic blocks that reference an instance data block, meaning they have static data. A function block allows you to pass parameters in the user program, which means they are suitable for programming frequently recurring, complex functions, such as closed-loop control and operating mode selection.
Function Block Diagram (FBD)
Function Block Diagram is one of the programming languages in STEP 7. FBD represents logic in the boxes familiar from Boolean algebra. In STEP 5, this language is known as Control System Flowchart (CSF).
I
Immediate Addressing In immediate addressing the address contains the value with which the instruction works. Example: L.27 means load constant 27 into accumulator.
Glossary-4
Glossary
Input, Incremental
When a block is input incrementally, each line or element is checked immediately for errors (for example syntax errors). If an error is detected, it is marked and must be corrected before programming is completed. Incremental input is possible in STL (Statement List), LAD (Ladder Logic), and FBD (Function Block Diagram).
Instance
An instance is the call of a function block. If, for example, a function is called five times in a STEP 7, then there are five instances. Each call is assigned to an instance data block.
Instance Data Block (DB)
An instance data block stores the formal parameters and the static local data of function blocks. An instance data block can be assigned to one or more function blocks.
Instruction
An instruction is part of a statement; it specifies what the processor should do.
K
Key Word Key words are used when programming with source files to identify the start and end of a block and to select sections in the declaration section of blocks, the start of block comments and the start of titles.
L
Ladder Logic (LAD) Ladder Logic is a graphic programming language in STEP 5 and STEP 7. Its representation is standardized in compliance with DIN 19239 (international standard IEC 1131-1). Ladder Logic representation corresponds to the representation of relay ladder logic diagrams. In contrast to Statement List (STL), LAD has a restricted set of instructions. In STEP 5, this language is known as Ladder Diagram.
Logic Block
Logic blocks are the blocks within STEP 7 that contain the program for the control logic. In contrast, data blocks (DBs) only contain data. There are the following types of logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), functions (FCs), function blocks (FBs), system functions (SFCs), and system function blocks (SFBs).
Glossary-5
Glossary
Logic String
A logic string is that portion of a user program which begins with an FC bit that has a signal state of 0 and which ends when an instruction or event resets the FC bit to 0. When the CPU executes the first instruction in a logic string, the FC bit is set to 1. Certain instructions such as output instructions (for example, Set, Reset, or Assign) reset the FC bit to 0. See First Check Bit above.
M
Master Control Relay The Master Control Relay (MCR) is an American relay ladder logic master switch for energizing and de-energizing power flow (current path). A de-energized current path corresponds to an instruction sequence that writes a zero value instead of the calculated value, or, to an instruction sequence that leaves the existing memory value unchanged.
Memory Area
A CPU in the SIMATIC Manager has three memory areas:
S Load memory S Work memory S System memory

Memory Indirect Addressing A type of addressing in which the address of an instruction indicates the location of the value with which the instruction is to work.
Mnemonic Representation
Mnemonic representation is an abbreviated form for displaying the names of addresses and programming instructions in the program (for example, I stands for input). STEP 7 supports the international representation (based on the English language), and the SIMATIC representation (based on the German abbreviations of the instruction set and the SIMATIC addressing conventions).
N
Nesting Stack The nesting stack is a storage byte used by the nesting instructions A(, O(, X(, AN(, ON(, XN(. A total of eight bit logic instructions can be stacked.
Network
Networks subdivide LAD blocks into complete current paths.
Glossary-6
Glossary
O
OR Bit The OR bit is needed if you perform a logical AND before OR operation. The OR bit shows these instructions that a previously executed AND function has supplied the value 1, thus forestalling the result of the logical OR operation. Any other bit-processing command resets the OR bit.
Overflow Bit
The status bit OS stands for overflow. An overflow can occur, for example, after a math operation.
P
Pointer You can use a pointer to identify the address of a variable. A pointer contains an identifier instead of a value. If you allocate an actual parameter type, you provide the memory address. With STEP 7 you can either enter the pointer in pointer format or simply as an identifier (e.g. M 50.0). In the following example, the pointer format is shown with which data from M 50.0 is accessed: P#M50.0
Project
A project is a container for all objects in an automation task, irrespective of the number of stations, modules, and how they are connected in networks.
R
Reference Data Reference data are used to check your CPU program and include cross reference lists, assignment list, user program structure, the list of unused addresses, and the list of addresses without symbols.
Register Indirect Addressing
A type of addressing in which the address of an instruction indicates indirectly via an address register and an offset the memory location of the value with which the instruction is to work.
Result of Logic Operation (RLO)
The result of logic operation (RLO) is the current signal state in the processor, which is used to process other binary signals. The execution of certain instructions depends entirely on their preceding RLO.
Glossary-7
Glossary
S
S7 Program A container for user programs, source files, and charts for S7 programmable controllers. The S7 program also includes the symbol table.
Shared Data Block (DB)
A shared data block is a DB whose address is loaded in the DB address register when it is opened. It provides storage and data for all logic blocks (FC, FB, or OB) that are being executed. In contrast, an instance DB is designed to be used as specific storage and data for the FB with which it has been associated.
SIMATIC Manager
The SIMATIC Manager is the graphical user interface for SIMATIC users under Windows 95.
Source File
A source file (text file) is part of a program created either with a graphic or a textual Editor and is compiled into an executable S7 user program or the machine code for M7. An S7 source file is stored un the Sources folder in the S7 program.
Statement
A statement is the smallest independent part of a user program created in a textual language. The statement represents a command for the processor.
Statement List (STL)
Statement List is a textual representation of the STEP 7 programming language, similar to machine code. STL is the assembler language of STEP 5 and STEP 7. If you program in STL, the individual statements represent the actual steps in which the CPU executes the program.
Station
A station is a device which can be connected to one or more subnets, for example the programmable controller, programming device, operator station.
Status Bit
The status bit stores the value of a bit that is referenced. The status of a bit instruction that has read access to the memory (A, AN, O, ON, X, XN) is always the same as the value of the bit that this instruction checks (the bit on which it performs its logic operation). The status of a bit instruction that has write access to the memory (S, R, =) is the same as the value of the bit to which the instruction writes or, if no writing takes place, the same as the value of the bit that the instruction references. The status bit has no significance for bit instructions that do not access the memory. Such instructions set the status bit to 1 (STA=1). The status bit is not checked by an instruction. It is interpreted during program test (program status) only.
Glossary-8
Glossary
Status Word
The status word is part of the register of the CPU. It contains status information and error information which is displayed when specific STEP 7 commands are executed. The status bits can be read and written on by the user, the error bits can only be read.
STL Source File
A source file programmed in Statement List.
Stored Overflow Bit
The status bit OS stands for stored overflow bit of the status word. An overflow can take place, for example, after a math operation.
Symbolic Addressing
In symbolic addressing the address being processed is designated with a symbol (as opposed to an absolute address).
System Function (SFC)
A system function is integrated in the CPU and can, if necessary, be called from the STEP 7 user program.
System Function Block (SFB)
A system function block is a function block that is integrated in the S7 operating system that you can call from your program if necessary.
Symbol
A symbol is a name which can be defined by the user subject to syntax guidelines. After it has been declared (for example, as a variable, data type, jump label, block etc) the symbol can be used for programming and for operator interface functions. Example: Address: I 5.0, data type: Bool, Symbol: momentary contact switch / emergency stop.
Symbol Table
A table in which the symbols of addresses for shared data and blocks are allocated. Examples: Emergency Stop (symbol) -I 1.7 (address) or closed-loop control (symbol) - SFB24 (block).
U
User Data Types (UDTs) User data types are special data structures which you can create yourself and use in the entire CPU program after they have been defined. They can be used like elementary or complex data types in the variable declaration of logic blocks (FCs, FBs, OBs) or as a template for creating data blocks with the same data structure.
Glossary-9
Glossary
User Program
The user program contains all the statements and declarations and all the data for signal processing which can be used to control a device or a process. It is part of a programmable module (CPU, FM) and can be structured with smaller units (blocks).
User Program (SW Object)
A container for blocks loaded into a programmable S7 module (e.g. CPU, FM) where they are capable of running to control a unit or process.
User Program Structure
The user program structure describes the call hierarchy of the blocks within a CPU program and provides an overview of the blocks used and their dependency.
V
Variable Declaration The variable declaration includes a symbolic name, a data type and, optionally, an initial value, an address, and a comment.
Variable Declaration Table
The variable declaration table is used for declaring the local data of a logic block, when programming takes place in the Incremental Editor.
Variable Table
The variable table is used for compiling all the variables that are to be observed and controlled along with their corresponding formats.
Glossary-10
Index
Symbols
(Word) And Double Word (WAND_DW) instruction, 15-415-5 (Word) And Word (WAND_W) instruction, 15-315-4 (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word (WXOR_DW) instruction, 15-815-9 (Word) Exclusive Or Word (WXOR_W) instruction, 15-715-8 (Word) Or Double Word (WOR_DW) instruction, 15-615-7 (Word) Or Word (WOR_W) instruction, 15-515-6 ( ). See Output Coil instruction (#). See Midline Output instruction (CALL). See Call FC/SFC from Coil instruction (CD). See Down Counter Coil instruction (CU). See Up Counter Coil instruction (JMP). See Jump instruction (JMPN). See JumpIfNot instruction (MCR<). See Master Control Relay On instruction (MCR>). See Master Control Relay Off instruction (N). See Negative RLO Edge Detection instruction (P). See Positive RLO Edge Detection instruction (R). See Reset Coil instruction (RET). See Return instruction (S). See Set Coil instruction (SAVE). See Save RLO to BR Memory instruction (SC). See Set Counter Value instruction (SD). See On-Delay Timer Coil instruction (SE). See Extended Pulse Timer Coil instruction (SF). See Off-Delay Timer Coil instruction (SP). See Pulse Timer Coil instruction (SS). See Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil instruction (ZR). See Down Counter Coil instruction, SIMATIC short name (ZV). See Up Counter Coil instruction, SIMATIC short name | |. See Normally Open Contact (Address) instruction | BIE |. See Exception Bit BR Memory instruction, SIMATIC short name | BR |. See Exception Bit BR Memory instruction | OV |. See Exception Bit Overflow instruction | OVS|. See Exception Bit Overflow Stored instruction | UO |. See Exception Bit Unordered instruction |/|. See Normally Closed Contact (Address) instruction |NOT|. See Invert Power Flow instruction
A
Absolute addressing, practical application, B-4 Absolute value, floating-point number, 12-8 Accumulators count value in, 10-2 time value in, 9-3 ACOS. See Arc cosine Actual value data view of, 4-6 reinitializing, 4-7 Actual values changing, 4-7 saving, 4-7 Add Double Integer (ADD_DI) math instruction, 11-311-4 Add Integer (ADD_I) math instruction, 11-211-3 Add Real (ADD_R) floating-point math instruction, 12-312-4 ADD_DI. See Add Double Integer math instruction
Index-1
Index
ADD_I. See Add Integer math instruction ADD_R. See Add Real floating-point math instruction Address, 3-7 description of, 7-4 entering in Ladder, 3-23 label for a jump instruction, 18-2 types, 7-4 Address Negative Edge Detection (NEG) instruction, 8-228-23 Address Positive Edge Detection (POS) instruction, 8-218-22 Addressing absolute, B-4 definition of, 7-2 symbolic, 3-24, B-3 Arc cosine (ACOS), 12-1312-15 Arc sine (ASIN), 12-1312-14 Arc tangent (ATAN), 12-13 Arrays, in the variable declaration table, 3-9 ASIN. See Arc sine Assign a Value (MOVE) instruction, 14-214-3 Assignment DBs to FBs, 4-4 DBs to UDTs, 4-4 ATAN. See Arc tangent
B
BCD. See Binary coded decimal format BCD to Double Integer (BCD_DI) conversion instruction, 14-714-8 BCD to Integer (BCD_I) conversion instruction, 14-414-5 BCD_DI. See BCD to Double Integer conversion instruction BCD_I. See BCD to Integer conversion instruction BCDF. See Errors, binary coded decimal conversion Binary coded decimal (BCD) format, C-8 Binary result (BR) Exception Bit BR Memory | BR | instruction, 19-3 saving the RLO to the binary result bit, 8-8 Bit, as data type, C-2 Bit logic, practical applications, B-3B-6
Bit logic instructions, 8-28-33 See also Status bit instructions Address Negative Edge Detection, 8-228-23 Address Positive Edge Detection, 8-218-22 Down Counter Coil (CD), 8-13 Extended Pulse Timer Coil (SE), 8-15 Invert Power Flow |NOT|, 8-7 Midline Output (#), 8-68-7 Negative RLO Edge Detection (N), 8-20 Normally Closed Contact (Address) |/|, 8-48-5 Normally Open Contact (Address) | |, 8-38-4 Off-Delay Timer Coil (SF), 8-18 On-Delay Timer Coil (SD), 8-16 Output Coil ( ), 8-58-6 Positive RLO Edge Detection (P), 8-19 practical applications, B-3B-6 Pulse Timer Coil (SP), 8-148-15 Reset Coil (R), 8-10 Reset Set Flipflop, 8-248-25 Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil (SS), 8-17 Save RLO to BR Memory, 8-8 Set Coil (S), 8-9 Set Counter Value (SC), 8-11 Set Reset Flipflop, 8-238-24 Up Counter Coil (CU), 8-12 Block attributes, in the Incremental Editor, 5-3 Block properties, 3-2, 4-2 processing of, 5-2 Block protection, 5-3 Blocks abandoning, 20-7 calling, 20-220-6 from libraries, 3-20 creating, 2-5 downloading, 2-6 entering in STL, 3-14 opening, 2-5 order of creating, 2-7 properties, 3-2, 4-2 saving, 2-6 Boolean (BOOL) as data type, C-2 range, 7-3, C-3
Index-2
Index
Branch, creating, 3-21 Byte as data type, C-2 range, 7-3, C-3
C
Call environment, 5-7 See also Trigger conditions Call FC/SFC from Coil (CALL) instruction, 20-220-3 Calling function blocks effect of the call on the bits of the status word, 20-4 from a box, 20-420-6 supplying parameters, 20-6 Calling functions effect of the call on the bits of the status word, 20-4 from a box, 20-420-6 supplying parameters, 20-6 with the Call FC/SFC from Coil instruction, 20-220-3 Calling system function blocks effect of the call on the bits of the status word, 20-4 from a box, 20-420-6 supplying parameters, 20-6 Calling system functions effect of the call on the bits of the status word, 20-4 supplying parameters, 20-6 with the Call FC/SFC from Coil instruction, 20-220-3 CEIL. See Ceiling conversion instruction Ceiling (CEIL) conversion instruction, 14-1714-18 Character (CHAR), range, 7-3, C-3 Checking the scan time, 5-9 CMP_D. See Compare Double Integer instruction CMP_I. See Compare Integer instruction CMP_R. See Compare Real instruction Code section, 3-2 editable parts, 3-13 editing, 3-13 Ladder, 3-4 Color, of selections, 3-18 Column width, in the variable declaration table, 3-7
Comment block comment, 3-28 in the declaration table, 3-7 network comment, 3-28 Compare Double Integer (CMP_D) instruction, 13-313-4 Compare Integer (CMP_I) instruction, 13-213-3 Compare Real (CMP_R) instruction, 13-513-6 Comparing the result of a math function to 0, 19-419-5 Comparison instructions Compare Double Integer, 13-313-4 Compare Integer, 13-213-3 Compare Real, 13-513-6 practical applications, B-11B-12 Condition codes (CC 1 and CC 0) as affected by floating-point math instructions, 12-7 as related to the Exception Bit Unordered instruction, 19-619-7 as related to the Result Bits instructions, 19-419-5 Conversion instructions BCD to Double Integer (BCD_DI), 14-714-8 BCD to Integer (BCD_I), 14-414-5 Ceiling (CEIL), 14-1714-18 Double Integer to BCD (DI_BCD), 14-814-9 Double Integer to Real (DI_REAL), 14-914-10 Floor (FLOOR), 14-1814-19 Integer to BCD (I_BCD), 14-514-6 Integer to Double Integer (I_DINT), 14-614-7 Negate Real Number (NEG_R), 14-1414-15 Ones Complement Double Integer (INV_DI), 14-1114-12 Ones Complement Integer (INV_I), 14-1014-11 Round to Double Integer (ROUND), 14-1514-16 Truncate Double Integer Part (TRUNC), 14-1614-17 Twos Complement Double Integer (NEG_DI), 14-1314-14 Twos Complement Integer (NEG_I), 14-1214-13
Index-3
Index
Count value format, 10-2 range, 10-2 Counters area in memory, 10-2 count value format, 10-2 range, 10-2 instructions used with counters Down Counter Coil (CD), 8-13 practical applications, B-11B-12 Set Counter Value (SC), 8-11 Up Counter Coil (CU), 8-12 Up-Down Counter (S_CUD), 10-310-4 number supported, 10-2 Counting down, 8-13, 10-710-8 up, 8-12, 10-510-6 up and down, 10-310-4 CPU registers, accumulators count value in accumulator 1, 10-2 time value in accumulator 1, 9-3 Create data block, 4-4 user program, 3-2
D
Data block (DB) changing actual values, 4-7 instance, 20-6 methods of creating, 4-2 Data blocks, 2-3 data view of, 4-6 declaration view, 4-5 with associated FB, 4-2 with associated UDT, 4-2 Data format. See Number notation Data type, in the declaration table, 3-7 Data types, 7-3, C-2 Boolean (BOOL), 7-3, C-2, C-3 BYTE, 7-3, C-3 byte, C-2 character (CHAR), 7-3, C-3 date (D), 7-3, C-3 DATE AND TIME (DT), C-10 double integer (DINT), 7-3, C-3, C-4 double word (DWORD), 7-3, C-2, C-3 integer (INT), 7-3, C-3 REAL, 7-3, C-3 real (REAL), C-4C-6
S5 TIME, 7-3, C-3, C-9 time (T), 7-3, C-3 time of day (TOD), 7-3, C-3 user defined, 2-4 WORD, 7-3, C-3 word, C-2 Data view, 4-6 Date and time (DT) format, C-10 range, C-9 Debugging, 3-23 Declaration table for data blocks, 4-2 structure when creating a DB, 4-5 syntax check, 4-5 Declaration type changing, 3-8 meaning, 3-7 Declaration view, 4-5 DI_BCD. See Double Integer to BCD conversion instruction DI_REAL. See Double Integer to Real conversion instruction DIV_DI. See Divide Double Integer math instruction DIV_I. See Divide Integer math instruction DIV_R. See Divide Real floating-point math instruction Divide Double Integer (DIV_DI) math instruction, 11-911-10 Divide Integer (DIV_I) math instruction, 11-811-9 Divide Real (DIV_R) floating-point math instruction, 12-612-7 Double integer (DINT), range, 7-3, C-3 Double Integer to BCD (DI_BCD) conversion instruction, 14-814-9 Double Integer to Real (DI_REAL) conversion instruction, 14-914-10 Double integers comparing two, 13-313-4 format, C-4 range, C-4 Double word (DWORD) data type, C-2 range, 7-3, C-3 Down Counter (S_CD) instruction, 10-710-8 Down Counter Coil (CD) instruction, 8-13 Downloading blocks, 2-6
Index-4
Index
E
Edge detection, 8-198-25 Edit, the variable declaration table, 4-5 Editing, variable declaration tables, 3-8 Editing during program execution, 2-7 Editor, settings for LAD, 3-3 Enable output (ENO). See Binary result Enter Ladder logic elements, 3-19 Errors, binary coded decimal conversion (BCDF), 14-4, 14-7 Examples, practical applications of instructions, B-2B-16 Exception Bit BR Memory | BR | instruction, 19-3 Exception Bit Overflow | OV | instruction, 19-719-8 Exception Bit Overflow Stored | OS | instruction, 19-919-10 Exception Bit Unordered | UO | instruction, 19-619-7 as related to floating-point math, 19-619-7 Exponential value, floating-point number, 12-12 Extended Pulse S5 Timer (S_PEXT), 9-79-8 Extended Pulse Timer Coil (SE) instruction, 8-15
Function blocks (FBs), 2-2 calling FBs from a box, 20-420-6 supplying parameters, 20-6 Functions (FCs), 2-2 calling FCs from a box, 20-420-6 calling FCs with the Call FC/SFC from Coil instruction, 20-220-3 supplying parameters, 20-6
I
I_BCD. See Integer to BCD conversion instruction I_DINT. See Integer to Double Integer conversion instruction Identification of symbols, 3-24 Information overview, iv Initial value, with data blocks, 4-6 Initial values, 3-7 Instance data block (DI), 20-6 Instance data blocks, 4-2 creating, 4-4 Instruction browser, 3-19 Instructions See also Operations alphabetical listing, A-2A-16 international full names with international short names, A-2A-4 international names with SIMATIC equivalents, A-5A-8 international short names and SIMATIC short names, A-16 SIMATIC names with international equivalents, A-12A-15 SIMATIC names with international short names, A-9A-11 bit logic, 8-28-33 practical applications, B-3B-6 comparison, practical applications, B-11B-12 counter, practical applications, B-11B-12 dependent on the Master control Relay (MCR), 20-8 floating-point math, 12-212-11 valid ranges of results, 12-7 integer math practical applications, B-13B-14 valid range for results, 11-11 practical applications, B-2B-16 rotate, 16-1016-13
F
Flipflop, 8-238-26 Floating-point math Arc cosine (ACOS), 12-1312-15 Arc sine (ASIN), 12-1312-14 Arc tangent (ATAN), 12-13 as related to the Exception Bit Unordered | UO | instruction, 19-619-7 Floating-point math instructions, 12-212-11 Add Real (ADD_R), 12-312-4 Divide Real (DIV_R), 12-612-7 Multiply Real (MUL_R), 12-512-6 Subtract Real (SUB_R), 12-412-5 valid ranges of results, 12-7 Floatingpoint numbers, data type for. See Real number, data type FLOOR. See Floor conversion instruction Floor (FLOOR) conversion instruction, 14-1814-19 Format count value, 10-2 time value, 9-3
Index-5
Index
shift, 16-216-13 shift and rotate, 16-216-18 status bit, 19-219-12 that evaluate the condition codes (CC 1 and CC 0), 12-7 that evaluate the overflow bit (OV) of the status word, 12-7 that evaluate the stored overflow bit (OS) of the status word, 12-7 timer, practical applications, B-7B-10 word logic, 15-215-14 practical applications, B-14B-15 Integer (INT), range, 7-3, C-3 Integer math, valid range for results, 11-11 Integer math instructions Add Double Integer (ADD_DI), 11-311-4 Add Integer (ADD_I), 11-211-3 Divide Double Integer (DIV_DI), 11-911-10 Divide Integer (DIV_I), 11-811-9 Multiply Double Integer (MUL_DI), 11-711-8 Multiply Integer (MUL_I), 11-611-7 practical applications, B-13B-14 Return Fraction Double Integer (MOD_DI), 11-1011-11 Subtract Double Integer (SUB_DI), 11-511-6 Subtract Integer (SUB_I), 11-411-5 Integer to BCD (I_BCD) conversion instruction, 14-514-6 Integer to Double Integer (I_DINT) conversion instruction, 14-614-7 Integers comparing two, 13-213-3 format, C-3 International full names for instructions, alphabetical listing, with international short names, A-2A-4 International names of instructions, alphabetical listing, with SIMATIC equivalents, A-5A-8 INV_DI. See Ones Complement Double Integer conversion instruction INV_I. See Ones Complement Integer conversion instruction Invert Power Flow |NOT| instruction, 8-7
K
Know-how-protection, 5-3
L
Label, 18-6 as address of a jump (logic control) instruction, 18-2 LAD. See Ladder Logic Ladder, rules, 3-15 Ladder Logic (LAD), definition of, 1-1 Ladder program status, possible settings, 5-6 testing, 5-5 Libraries, 3-20 Loading a count value format, 10-2 range, 7-3, C-3 Loading a time value format, 9-2 range, 7-3, C-3 Logarithm, natural, 12-11 Logic blocks creating, 3-2 in the Incremental Editor, 3-2 structure, 3-2 Logic control instructions Jump (JMP), 18-318-4 JumpIfNot (JMPN), 18-5 label as address, 18-2
M
Master Control Relay (MCR) dependency on, 20-8 effect on Set Coil (S) and Reset Coil (R) instructions, 20-8 Master Control Relay (MCR) instructions, 20-820-16 Master Control Relay Off (MCR>), 20-1220-13 Master Control Relay On (MCR<), 20-1220-13 nesting operations, 20-13 Master Control Relay Off (MCR>) instruction, 20-1220-13 Master Control Relay On (MCR<) instruction, 20-1220-13 Memory areas, counter, 10-2 Method of creating a DB, selecting, 4-4
J
Jump (JMP) instruction, 18-318-4 JumpIfNot (JMPN) instruction, 18-5
Index-6
Index
Midline Output (#) instruction, 8-68-7 MOD_DI. See Return Fraction Double Integer math instruction MOVE. See Assign a Value instruction Move instructions, Assign a Value (MOVE), 14-214-3 MUL_DI. See Multiply Double Integer math instruction MUL_I. See Multiply Integer math instruction MUL_R. See Multiply Real floating-point math instruction Multiple instances calling, 3-10, 3-20 declaring, 3-10 rules for declaring, 3-10 Multiply Double Integer (MUL_DI) math instruction, 11-711-8 Multiply Integer (MUL_I) math instruction, 11-611-7 Multiply Real (MUL_R) floating-point math instruction, 12-512-6
Number notation, C-2C-9 binary coded decimal (BCD), C-8 bit, C-2 byte, C-2 DATE AND TIME (DT), C-10 double integer, C-4 double word, C-2 floating-point, C-4C-6 integer, C-3 real, C-4C-6 S5 TIME, C-9 word, C-2
O
Off-Delay S5 Timer (S_OFFDT), 9-139-14 Off-Delay Timer Coil (SF) instruction, 8-18 On-Delay S5 Timer (S_ODT), 9-99-11 On-Delay Timer Coil (SD) instruction, 8-16 Ones Complement Double Integer (INV_DI) conversion instruction, 14-1114-12 Ones Complement Integer (INV_I) conversion instruction, 14-1014-11 Open, a block, 2-5 Operations. See Instructions OR instruction, Ladder, 3-21 Order, blocks, 2-7 Organization blocks, 2-2 Output Coil ( ) instruction, 8-58-6 Overflow (OV) as affected by floating-point math instructions, 12-7 Exception Bit Overflow | OV | instruction, 19-719-8 Overwrite mode, 3-26 Overwriting addresses/parameters, 3-26 junctions in Ladder, 3-27 Ladder elements, 3-26
N
Natural logarithm, floating-point number, 12-11 NEG. See Address Negative Edge Detection instruction NEG_DI. See Twos Complement Double Integer conversion instruction NEG_I. See Twos Complement Integer conversion instruction NEG_R. See Negate Real Number conversion instruction Negate Real Number (NEG_R) conversion instruction, 14-1414-15 Negative RLO Edge Detection (N) instruction, 8-20 Nesting operations, Master Control Relay (MCR), 20-13 Network inserting, 3-18 selecting, 3-18 Normally Closed Contact (Address) |/| instruction, 8-48-5 Normally Open Contact (Address) | | instruction, 8-38-4 Number format. See Number notation
P
Parallel branch, 3-21 opening, 3-22 Parameter, entering in Ladder, 3-23
Index-7
Index
POS. See Address Positive Edge Detection instruction Positive RLO Edge Detection (P) instruction, 8-19 Power flow, inverting, 8-7 Program control instructions Call FC/SFC from Coil (CALL), 20-220-3 Master Control Relay Off (MCR>), 20-1220-13 Master Control Relay On (MCR<), 20-1220-13 Return (RET), 20-7 Program status, 5-5 See also Test selecting the call environment, 5-7 settings, 5-6 starting and stopping, 5-8 Programming, practical applications, B-2B-16 Programming language, selection, 2-5 Pulse S5 Timer (S_PULSE), 9-59-6 Pulse Timer Coil (SP) instruction, 8-148-15
Rotate instructions, 16-1016-13 Rotate Left Double Word (ROL_DW), 16-1016-11 Rotate Right Double Word (ROR_DW), 16-1116-12 Rotate Left Double Word (ROL_DW) instruction, 16-1016-11 Rotate Right Double Word (ROR_DW) instruction, 16-1116-12 ROUND. See Round to Double Integer conversion instruction Round to Double Integer (ROUND) conversion instruction, 14-1514-16 RS. See Reset Set Flipflop instruction Rules, Ladder, 3-15
S
S_AVERZ. See OffDelay S5 Timer instruction, SIMATIC short name S_CD. See see Down Counter instruction S_CU. See see Up Counter instruction S_CUD. See Up-Down Counter instruction S_EVERZ. See OnDelay S5 Timer instruction, SIMATIC short name S_IMPULS. See Pulse S5 Timer instruction, SIMATIC short name S_ODT. See On-Delay S5 Timer instruction S_ODTS. See Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer instruction S_OFFDT. See Off-Delay S5 Timer instruction S_PEXT. See Extended Pulse S5 Timer instruction S_PULSE. See Pulse S5 Timer instruction S_SEVERZ. See Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer instruction, SIMATIC short name S_VIMP. See Extended Pulse S5 Timer instruction, SIMATIC short name S5 TIME format, C-9 range, 7-3, C-3 time base, 9-29-3, C-9 time value, 9-2 Save RLO to BR Memory (SAVE) instruction, 8-8 Saving blocks, 2-6 Scan time, 5-9 Selecting in networks, 3-18 Ladder instructions, 3-18
R
Real number comparing two real numbers, 13-513-6 data type, 7-3, C-3 format, C-4C-6 range, 7-3, C-3 Reinitialize, an actual value, 4-7 Reinitializing, 4-7 Repetition factor, 3-9 Reset Coil (R) instruction, 8-10 Reset Set Flipflop (RS) instruction, 8-248-25 Result Bit instructions, 19-419-5 Result of logic operation (RLO) inverting, 8-7 negating, 8-7 Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer (S_ODTS), 9-119-12 Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil (SS) instruction, 8-17 Return (RET) instruction, 20-7 Return Fraction Double Integer (MOD_DI) math instruction, 11-1011-11 ROL_DW. See Rotate Left Double Word instruction ROR_DW. See Rotate Right Double Word instruction
Index-8
Index
Set Coil (S) instruction, 8-9 Set Counter Value (SC) instruction, 8-11 Set Reset Flipflop (SR) instruction, 8-238-24 Setting the Editor in LAD, 3-3 the Ladder program status, 5-6 Setting a counter value, 8-11 SFB, 2-4 SFC, 2-4 Shift and rotate instructions, 16-216-18 Shift instructions, 16-216-13 Shift Left Double Word (SHL_DW), 16-416-5 Shift Left Word (SHL_W), 16-216-3 Shift Right Double Integer (SHR_DI), 16-916-10 Shift Right Double Word (SHR_DW), 16-616-7 Shift Right Integer (SHR_I), 16-716-8 Shift Right Word (SHR_W), 16-516-6 Shift Left Double Word (SHL_DW) instruction, 16-416-5 Shift Left Word (SHL_W) instruction, 16-216-3 Shift Right Double Integer (SHR_DI) instruction, 16-916-10 Shift Right Double Word (SHR_DW) instruction, 16-616-7 Shift Right Integer (SHR_I) instruction, 16-716-8 Shift Right Word (SHR_W) instruction, 16-516-6 SHL_DW. See Shift Left Double Word instruction SHL_W. See Shift Left Word instruction SHR_DI. See Shift Right Double Integer instruction SHR_DW. See Shift Right Double Word instruction SHR_I. See Shift Right Integer instruction SHR_W. See Shift Right Word instruction SIMATIC Manager, 2-4 SIMATIC names of instructions, alphabetical listing with international equivalents, A-12A-15 with international short names, A-9A-11 Splitting junctions, Ladder, 3-27 Square, floating-point number, 12-912-10 Square root, floating-point number, 12-912-10 SR. See Set Reset Flipflop instruction Standard block, 5-3
Status bit instructions, 19-219-12 Exception Bit BR Memory | BR |, 19-3 Exception Bit Overflow | OV |, 19-719-8 Exception Bit Overflow Stored | OS |, 19-919-10 Exception Bit Unordered | UO |, 19-619-7 Result Bits, 19-419-5 Status word binary result (BR) bit, 19-3 condition codes (CC 1 and CC 0) as related to the Exception Bit Unordered instruction, 19-619-7 condition codes (CC 1 and CC 0) as related to the Result Bits instructions, 19-419-5 effect of calling an FB, FC, SFB, or SFC on the bits of the status word, 20-4 invalid range for the result of integer math, 11-11 overflow bit, 19-719-8 status bit instructions, 19-219-12 stored overflow (OS) bit, 19-919-10 structure, 19-2 valid range for the result of integer math, 11-11 STL Incremental Editor, 2-4 starting the Editor, 2-4 Stored overflow (OS) as affected by floating-point math instructions, 12-7 Exception Bit Overflow Stored | OS | instruction, 19-919-10 Structures, in the variable declaration table, 3-8 SUB_DI. See Subtract Double Integer math instruction SUB_I. See Subtract Integer math instruction SUB_R. See Subtract Real floating-point math instruction Subtract Double Integer (SUB_DI) math instruction, 11-511-6 Subtract Integer (SUB_I) math instruction, 11-411-5 Subtract Real (SUB_R) floating-point math instruction, 12-412-5 Symbol information, 3-24 Symbol table, 3-24 Symbolic addressing, 3-24 practical example, B-3 Syntax check, 4-5
Index-9
Index
System function blocks. See SFB System function blocks (SFBs) calling SFBs from a box, 20-420-6 supplying parameters, 20-6 System functions. See SFC System functions (SFCs) calling SFCs from a box, 20-420-6 calling SFCs with the Call FC/SFC from Coil instruction, 20-220-3 supplying parameters, 20-6
T
Test environment laboratory, 5-8 process, 5-8 selecting, 5-8 Testing a Ladder program, 5-5 Time base, reading, 9-3 Time base for S5 TIME, 9-29-3, C-9 Time of day (TOD), range, 7-3, C-3 Time resolution. See Time base for S5 TIME Time stamp conflict, 3-9 Time value format in accumulator 1, 9-3 range, 9-29-3 reading, 9-3 syntax, 9-2 Timers components, 9-29-3 instructions used with timers Extended Pulse S5 Timer (S_PEXT), 9-79-8 Extended Pulse Timer Coil (SE), 8-15 Off-Delay S5 Timer (S_OFFDT), 9-139-14 Off-Delay Timer Coil (SF), 8-18 On-Delay S5 Timer (S_ODT), 9-99-11 On-Delay Timer Coil (SD), 8-16 practical applications, B-7B-10 Pulse S5 Timer (S_PULSE), 9-59-6 Pulse Timer Coil (SP), 8-148-15 Retentive On-Delay S5 Timer (S_ODTS), 9-119-12 Retentive On-Delay Timer Coil (SS), 8-17 location in memory, 9-2 number supported, 9-2 reading the time and the time base, 9-3 resolution. See Time base for S5 TIME time base for S5 TIME, 9-29-3
time value, 9-2 range, 9-29-3 syntax, 9-2 types, overview, 9-4 Title block title, 3-28 network title, 3-28 Trigger conditions, 5-7 Trigonometrical functions, angles, 12-13 TRUNC. See Truncate Double Integer Part conversion instruction Truncate Double Integer Part (TRUNC) conversion instruction, 14-1614-17 Twos Complement Double Integer (NEG_DI) conversion instruction, 14-1314-14 Twos Complement Integer (NEG_I) conversion instruction, 14-1214-13
U
UDT, 2-4 See also User defined data types creating, 4-8 definition, 4-2 function, 4-8 Unlinked, 5-3 Up Counter (S_CU) instruction, 10-510-6 Up Counter Coil (CU) instruction, 8-12 Up-Down Counter (S_CUD) instruction, 10-310-4 User data type, 4-8 definition, 4-2 User program creating, 2-4 structure, 2-2 User-defined data types. See UDT User-defined data types (UDT), 2-4
V
Variable, 3-7 Variable declaration table, 3-2, 3-4, 3-6 editing, 3-8, 4-5 purpose, 3-6 structure, 3-6
W
WAND_DW. See (Word) And Double Word instruction WAND_W. See (Word) And Word instruction
Index-10
Index
WOR_DW. See (Word) Or Double Word instruction WOR_W. See (Word) Or Word instruction WORD, range, 7-3, C-3 Word, data type, C-2 Word logic instructions, 15-215-14 (Word) And Double Word (WAND_DW), 15-415-5 (Word) And Word (WAND_W), 15-315-4 (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word (WXOR_DW), 15-815-9 (Word) Exclusive Or Word (WXOR_W), 15-715-8 (Word) Or Double Word (WOR_DW), 15-615-7 (Word) Or Word (WOR_W), 15-515-6 practical applications, B-14B-15
WXOR_DW. See (Word) Exclusive Or Double Word instruction WXOR_W. See (Word) Exclusive Or Word instruction
Z
Z_RUECK. See Down Counter instruction, SIMATIC short name Z_VORW. See Up Counter instruction, SIMATIC short name ZAEHLER. See UpDown Counter instruction, SIMATIC short name
Index-11
Index
Index-12
Siemens AG AUT E 146 stliche Rheinbrckenstr. 50 D76181 Karlsruhe Federal Republic of Germany
From: Your Name: _ _ _ _ Your Title: _ _ _ _ Company Name: _ Street: _ City, Zip Code_ Country: _ Phone: _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please check any industry that applies to you: Automotive Chemical Electrical Machinery Food Instrument and Control Nonelectrical Machinery Petrochemical Pharmaceutical Plastic Pulp and Paper Textiles Transportation Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do the contents meet your requirements? Is the information you need easy to find? Is the text easy to understand? Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements? Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
Additional comments: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Siemens Lad

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Lad

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Lad

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface, Contents Part 1: Working with the Ladder Editor Part 2: Language Description

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 Programming

Note the following:

Copyright E Siemens AG 1996 All rights reserved

Scope of the Manual

Compliance with Standards

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Overview of the STEP 7 Documentation

S7-300 Programmable Controller Quick Start Manuals on S7-300/S7-400 Hardware

System Software for S7-300/S7-400 Program Design

Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7

/xxx/: Number in the list of references

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

STEP 7 User Manual

Converting S5 Programs User Manual

STL, LAD, FBD, SCL1 Manuals

GRAPH1 , HiGraph1, CFC1 Manuals

Optional package for system software for S7-300/S7-400

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

How to Use This Manual

Notes on Using the Manual

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 8.19 8.20 8.21 8.22 8.23 9

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Shift and Rotate Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 16.2 Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Block Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Open Data Block: DB or DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Master Control Relay On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Number Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 Number Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Part 1: Working with the Ladder Editor

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

The Programming Language Ladder Logic

The Programming Package

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Page 2-2 2-4 2-7

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Structure of User Programs

Logic Blocks and Data Blocks

Functions/ Function Blocks

S A function block (FB) is a logic block with memory. This memory

S A function (FC) is a logic block without memory, in other words

The operating system makes the following data available:

S Peripheral I/Os S Process image input/output S Bit memory S Timers S Counters

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

You can also define your own data:

The Programming Manual /234/ contains an introduction to programming methods.

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

Creating User Programs Overview

LAD Incremental Editor

Starting from the SIMATIC Manager

Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400 C79000-G7076-C504-02

SIMATIC Manager TRAFFIC File Edit Insert PLC View

Press F1 for help

Choosing a Programming Language